JP2019213789A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that suppresses decline in a game interest.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game; and setting means for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values. The determination means performs determination on the basis of the set value, and may execute a specific performance suggesting the set value when the number of game balls discharged to the outside of a game area 6 after the end of the consecutive games reaches the number of game balls put out by entering a big winning port 15 in the special game during the consecutive games.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 115

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, such as when a game ball wins a starting port, it is determined whether or not to enter a gaming state advantageous to a player. In this determination, the probability of determining that the game state is advantageous to the player cannot be arbitrarily set in the gaming machine.

JP 2018-47333 A

  However, there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine for which a determination is made as to whether or not to enter a gaming state advantageous to a player, in order to enhance gaming interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving amusement in entertainment.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
A starting prize area in which a game ball is provided in a game area where the game ball can flow, and a game ball can enter;
Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out, by the game balls having entered the start winning area,
Setting means for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values;
Effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
The effect control means, the payout number of game balls paid out when the special game is being performed, and the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area after the special game is performed Based on this, a specific effect indicating the set value set by the set value means may be executed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view illustrating a standby state of the movable panel, (B) is a front view illustrating a moving state of the movable panel, and (C) is a front view illustrating a rotating state of the movable panel. It is a front view of a display. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the basic embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the electric composition of the game control board side. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the effect control board side. (A) is a table showing ordinary figure related determination information, and (B) is a table showing special figure related determination information. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a big hit determination table when the set value is “1”, (B) is a big hit determination table when the set value is “2”, and (C) is a big hit determination table when the set value is “3”. (D) is a jackpot determination table when the set value is "4", (E) is a jackpot determination table when the set value is "5", and (F) is a setting table. It is a big hit determination table when the value is "6". (A) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (B) is a reach determination table. It is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table. It is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table. 9 is a first look-ahead determination table. It is a 2nd pre-reading determination table. (A) is a jackpot game control table, (B) is a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of a demonstration moving image, and (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) is an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure showing an example of a background image for probability change, and (E) is a figure showing an example of a background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening effect, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round effect, (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending effect. (A) is a figure showing an example of an effect symbol, and (B) is a figure showing an example of an effect symbol display area. It is a figure showing an example of the special figure fluctuation production of the loss without the reach. It is a figure showing an example from the start of a special figure fluctuation production to reach. It is a figure showing an example of N reach. It is a figure showing an example of SP reach. FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 24. FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating an example of SP reach, and is a continuation of FIG. 25. It is a figure showing an example of a movable body effect. It is a figure showing an example of an operation effect. It is a figure showing an example of a reservation effect. It is a figure showing an example of a reservation icon change notice. It is a figure showing an example of a reservation icon change notice. It is a flowchart of a game control main process. It is a flowchart of a setting value setting process. It is a flowchart of a game control timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of a sensor detection process, and is a diagram illustrating a continuation of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol change process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of an effect control main process. It is a flowchart of a 1 ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart of a reception command analysis process. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process, and is a diagram illustrating a continuation of FIG. 46. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an electrical configuration of a game control board side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a part of the flowchart of the sensor detection processing by the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 5 is a table showing a relationship between a set value and an out-ball determination value according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a table | surface which shows the relationship between the setting value and difference number determination value which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first composite symbol, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second composite symbol, (C) is a diagram showing an example of a third composite symbol, (D) is a first set value FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol, FIG. 7E is a diagram showing an example of a second set value symbol, and FIG. 7F is a diagram showing an example of a third set value symbol. It is a set value symbol pattern determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart of stop symbol pattern decision processing concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. It is a lottery result information determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of a setting value effect determination process. It is a flow chart of stop design pattern determination processing concerning a 5th embodiment of the present invention. It is a setting value effect execution determination table. It is a stop symbol pattern determination table for setting value effect. It is a normal stop symbol pattern determination table. It is a normal stop symbol pattern determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. It is a special figure fluctuation production pattern judgment table concerning a 6th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of a success / failure reversal effect determination process. It is a success / fail reversal effect execution determination table. It is a continuation number determination table. It is a figure showing an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of a setting value effect process. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of a setting value effect process, and is a diagram illustrating a continuation of FIG. 76. It is a big hit symbol type determination table according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a big hit game control table according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a game state setting table concerning an 8th embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a jackpot game production by a pachinko gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a jackpot game production by a pachinko gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a jackpot game production by a pachinko gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a set value effect by a pachinko gaming machine according to an eighth embodiment of the present invention, and the like. It is a blessing production judgment table. It is a blessing production judgment table. It is a flowchart of a blessing effect process. In the ninth embodiment of the present invention, it is a diagram showing a manner in which the effect symbol variation display starts in a normal start mode. It is a figure showing an example of a set value effect by a pachinko gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a set value effect by a pachinko gaming machine according to a ninth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of the setting value effect determination processing according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. It is a 2nd setting value effect determination table. It is a jackpot determination table according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a jackpot determination table according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a game state setting table concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a small hit game control table according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart of the special operation processing concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart of special figure 1 change pattern judgment processing concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart of the special symbol decision processing concerning a 10th embodiment of the present invention. It is a table | surface which shows the selectivity of a big hit, a small hit, and a losing according to 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing an electric configuration on the game control board side according to an eleventh embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart of the set value setting processing concerning an 11th embodiment of the present invention. It is a setting value determination table. It is a big hit determination table concerning a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. It is a big hit determination table concerning a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a gaming state setting table according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, and (B) is a small hitting game control table according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention. It is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table concerning a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. (A) is a hit determination table according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, (B) is a general pattern change pattern determination table according to the twelfth embodiment of the present invention, and (C) is a twelfth embodiment of the present invention. It is an auxiliary game control table according to the embodiment. It is a figure showing signs that a specific acquisition number is displayed. It is a figure showing signs that specific acquisition number and final specific acquisition number are displayed. It is a figure showing signs that a setting value suggestion image is displayed in a normal game state, and the setting value effect count value indicated by the setting value suggestion image is being subtracted. It is a figure showing signs that a set value effect is performed. It is a figure showing signs that a set value effect ends, or a condition that a set value effect continues. It is a block diagram showing the electrical composition of the production control board side concerning a 12th embodiment of the present invention.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is a premise of the characteristic portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each of the drawings referred to, the same portions are denoted by the same reference numerals, and redundant description of the same portions will be omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplicity of description, a symbol or code that refers to information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, or the like is described to omit or abbreviate the name of the information, signal, physical quantity, or member, or the like for the symbol or code. Sometimes.

1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the following description, the left, right, up and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 refer to the left, right, up and down directions (as viewed from the front) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In addition, “forward” is defined as a direction approaching the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 from the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and “backward” is defined as a direction approaching the pachinko gaming machine PY1 from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. ,explain.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a gaming board unit YU including a gaming board 1 and a gaming machine frame 2 in which the gaming board unit YU is housed. The gaming machine frame 2 is a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to a game store, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21, and a game board unit YU is attached, and before being rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. A door 23.

  The outer shapes of the outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 in a front view are substantially the same. The inner frame 22 is attached to the front of the outer frame 21.

  The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23m having a substantially vertical rectangular large opening formed at the approximate center, and a transparent plate 23t fitted into the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU faces the transparent plate 23t. The transparent plate 23t is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate into a substantially vertically rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is installed in a game store, a player in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can visually recognize the gaming area 6 formed on the front surface of the gaming board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. it can. Note that, as the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It is only necessary that the gaming area 6 can be visually recognized through the transparent plate 23t from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

  At the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 23m, a handle 72k that can be rotated to fire a game ball is provided. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the magnitude of the force (firing strength) applied to the game ball to fire the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is fired at a firing strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k.

  In addition, an upper plate 34 protruding greatly forward and a lower plate 35 disposed immediately below the upper plate 34 are provided at a lower portion of the front surface of the front frame 23m. A first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided at the front center of the upper plate 34. The operation portion projecting from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 of the first effect button 40k so as to be visible is formed in a hemispherical shape. Further, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k is formed on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34. On the upper surface of the lower plate 35, there is provided a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing an extra game ball that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A.

  Further, an upper decorative body 31, a right decorative body 32, and a left decorative body 33 projecting forward are provided above, on the right side, and on the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23m. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L disposed on the left side and a speaker 52R disposed on the right side, are directed downward and in the left-right direction. They are arranged side by side at a distance. A second effect button 41k that can be pressed down is provided below the right side decorative body 32. The operation portion of the second effect button 41k is formed in a rod shape. Further, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right decorative body 32 to the right front part of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the left front part of the upper plate 34.

  In addition, the position and number of members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game.

  Next, the game board unit YU will be described with reference to FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. At the approximate center of the game board 1, an opening 1A having a substantially circular shape in a front view is formed.

  A substantially ring-shaped center decoration 61 is formed on the front surface of the game board 1 so as to protrude forward along the opening 1A. Outside the center decorative body 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decorative body 61, and an outer rail between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decorative body 61. A curved inner rail 63 substantially parallel to 62 and the center decorative body 61 is formed.

  A region surrounded by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, and the like on the front surface of the game board 1 forms a game region 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into the game area 6 and other areas by the center decoration 61, the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63. The area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a firing area 7 through which the shot game balls can pass to the game area 6.

  The game area 6 is an area where a game ball fired by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game with the pachinko game machine PY1. In the game area 6, a number of game nails (not shown) are protruded. The game nails enter the game area 6 and flow the game balls flowing down the game area 6 appropriately to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the large winning opening 14, and the like. It constitutes a route leading to.

  A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6. In the general winning device 10D, a general winning opening 10 is formed so that game balls can enter. When the game balls enter the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In addition, the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

  A first start winning device 11D is provided directly below the center of the center decoration 61 in the game area 6. In the first start winning device 11D, the first start port 11 is formed so that game balls can enter. The first start winning device 11D has a non-operation structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 has a constant (unchanged) ease of entering a game ball without change. When a game ball enters the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that the game ball that has entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

  Note that a warp portion 61w through which the game ball passes is formed from the left side portion to the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61. The entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side of the center decorative body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp portion 61w exits from the exit through the inside of the warp portion 61w. A stage 61s on which the game ball can roll is provided near the exit of the warp portion 61w and on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decoration 61. At the tip of the stage 61s, a lower guiding portion 61y for guiding the game ball downward is provided. The first starting port 11 is provided directly below the lower guiding portion 61y.

  Immediately below the first starting port 11 in the game area 6, a second starting winning device (a so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided. The electric starter 12D is provided with a second starting port 12 that can be changed between a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter and an open state in which a game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by an electric tube opening / closing member 12k provided in the electric tube 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric tube opening and closing member 12k.

  The electric tube opening / closing member 12k is formed of a substantially L-shaped member when viewed from the front, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening / closing member 12k can protrude forward from the retracted state in which the front end surface is flush with the game area 6. When the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes perpendicularly to the game area 6, and the second starting port 12 is opened so as to be able to enter a ball. Specifically, a vertical portion provided on the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k receives the game ball, and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

  As described above, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

  The gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decoration 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow game balls to pass therethrough. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. Note that the game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

  On the right side of the first start winning device 11D in the game area 6 and downstream of the gate 13, a large winning device 14D is provided. The special winning device 14D is formed with a special winning opening 14 that can be changed between a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The special winning opening 14 has a closed mode and an open mode by an AT opening / closing member 14k included in the special winning device 14D. That is, the special winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening and closing member 14k.

  The AT opening / closing member 14k is a movable member formed of a flat plate having a substantially horizontal rectangular shape as viewed from the front, and usually closes the special winning opening 14. A horizontal rotating shaft is provided at the lower end of the AT opening / closing member 14k. The AT opening / closing member 14k can rotate about 90 degrees about its rotation axis such that the upper end falls forward. When the AT opening / closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening / closing member 14k projects perpendicularly to the game area 6, and the special winning opening 14 is opened so as to allow a ball to enter.

  In this way, it is possible to enter a game ball into the special winning opening 14 only when the AT opening / closing member 14k is in the open state. When game balls enter the special winning opening 14, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that the game balls that have entered the special winning opening 14 are discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as they are.

  In addition, below the big winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally below left, and a guide path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is provided in the game area 6 (the front of the game board 1). From the front. The game balls rolling on the upper surface of the guidance route 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but cannot enter the first starting port 11 basically.

  The entry of game balls into the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the big winning port 14, and the general winning port 10 and the passing of the game balls through the gate 13 are collectively described as the first starting port 11, The second starting opening 12, the big winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the "winning" to the gate 13 are collectively called.

  By the way, the game area 6 in which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k for firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is referred to as “left hit”. On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k for firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is referred to as "right strike".

  In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired left is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is fired right. Such a flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also constituted by a number of game nails (not shown).

  On the first flow path R1, a first starting port 11 and two general winning ports 10 are provided. Therefore, the player can aim at the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by left-handing. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a special winning port 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim at winning at the gate 13, the second starting port 12, or the big winning port 14 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the second channel R2 by right-handing.

  At the lowermost portion of the game area 6, there are provided two out ports 19 for discharging game balls that have been driven into the game area 6 but have not won any of the winning ports to the outside of the game area 6. I have. In addition, the number of prize balls by winning a prize in each winning opening can be appropriately set.

  Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back of the game board 1 will be described. The board rendering unit EU is a unit in which a plurality of devices that mainly perform rendering are unitized. The image display device 50 and the board movable device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

  The image display device 50 is configured by a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display unit 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1.

  The board movable device 55 includes an operable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k includes a horizontally long, plate-like elevating member 55k2 that is maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center in the left-right direction of the elevating member 55k2. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state where the board movable body 55k is arranged at the initial position, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically, the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1, is slightly lower than the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, in the standby state, only a part of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is visible to the player, and the board movable body 55k is arranged so that most of the movable member 55k is invisible (see FIG. 3A).

  Then, the board movable body 55k can be entirely lowered from the initial position to a predetermined operating position, rise from the operating position and return to the initial position (see FIG. 3B). The predetermined operating position is a position where the board movable body 55k is located substantially at the center of the opening 1A in a front view. Here, the predetermined work position can be set as appropriate, and may be a position where the board movable body 55k is located above or substantially below the center of the opening 1A in front view. Good.

  Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in a front view around a rotation axis formed in the front-rear direction at the center (see FIG. 3C). The rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the movable platen 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, when it is held at the operating position, and when it moves from the operating position to the standby position.

  In addition, the position and number of members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game.

  Next, a description will be given of the indicators 8 arranged on the right side of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 and at the substantially right center of the game area 6 in the vertical direction (a part other than the game area 6). As shown in FIG. 4, a special figure 1 display 81 a that variably displays a first special symbol (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure 1”) and a second special symbol (hereinafter, “special figure 2”) are displayed on the indicators 8. ) Is variably displayed, and a general figure display 82 variably displays an ordinary symbol (hereinafter, referred to as a “general figure”). In addition, the indicators 8 include a special figure 1 hold display 83a for displaying the number of special figure 1 reservations described later and a special figure 2 hold display 83b for displaying the number of special figure 2 reservations described later. .

  The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery is performed in response to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11. In addition, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball in the second starting port 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are collectively referred to as “special figure”, and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as “special figure lottery”. The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure display 81". Furthermore, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a and the special figure 2 reservation display 83b are collectively called "special figure reservation display 83".

  The variable display of the special figure notifies the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is stopped and displayed after the variable display. The stop-displayed special figure (stop special figure) is identification information indicating the result of the special figure lottery derived as a variable display result. If the special map stopped and displayed is a specific special map determined in advance, a jackpot game with opening of the special winning opening 14 is performed.

  The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting state of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b indicates the special figure according to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a jackpot, the first, second, fifth and sixth from the left, such as “□□ ■■ □□ ■■” (□: lit, ■: unlit) A certain LED lights up. This lighting mode is a big hit symbol and represents a big hit. Further, when the result of the special figure lottery is a loss, only the rightmost LED such as “■■■■■■■ □” is finally turned on. This lighting mode is a losing symbol, and represents losing. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited, and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a lost symbol.

  In the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the special figure is performed for a predetermined variable time before the special figure is stopped and displayed. In the variation display mode of the special figure, for example, each LED is lit so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink at the same time unless each LED is stopped (displayed in a specific mode).

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, there is a case where the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure are not immediately performed even when the game ball wins the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. Specifically, this is a case where a prize is won in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 of the game ball during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or the execution of the big hit game. In this case, the special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure are suspended based on the winning. The reserved special figure lottery and the variable display of the special figure are referred to as “special figure reservation”.

  The special figure reservation includes a special figure 1 lottery held based on the winning in the first opening 11, “special figure 1 holding” representing a variable display of the special figure 1, and a winning in the second starting opening 12. The special figure 2 lottery held based on the special figure 2 and “special figure 2 reservation” indicating the variable display of the special figure 2 are included. Then, the special figure 1 reservation display 83a displays the number of special figure 1 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 1 lotteries and variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation display 83b displays the number of special figure 2 reservations, that is, the number of reserved special figure 2 lotteries and the variable display of the special figure 2.

  It is also possible to set the upper limit value for the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations. When an upper limit is set for the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations, the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations may be the same or different. In the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 reservations and the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations are set to “4”.

  Each of the special figure 1 hold display 83a and the special figure 2 hold display 83b is composed of four LEDs, and the LEDs are turned on by the number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. The number of reservations in FIG. 1 and special figure 2 are displayed. In the following, the number of special figure 1 reservations is referred to as “special figure 1 reservation number (U1)”, and the number of special figure 2 reservations is referred to as “special figure 2 reservation number (U2)”. The “special figure 1 reserved number” and the “special figure 2 reserved number” are collectively referred to as “special figure reserved number”. Furthermore, the “special figure 1 hold display 83a” and the “special figure 2 hold display 83b” are collectively referred to as a “special figure hold display 83”.

  In addition, the variable display of the general figure is executed when the general figure lottery is performed in response to the winning of the game ball at the gate 13. Then, the variable display of the general figure notifies the result of the general figure lottery. In the variable display of the general figure, the variable figure is stopped and displayed after the variable display. The stop-displayed general-purpose figure (stop general-purpose figure) is identification information representing the result of the general-purpose lottery derived as a display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed general-purpose figure is a predetermined specific general-purpose figure, an auxiliary game involving opening of the second starting port 12 is performed.

  The general-purpose indicator 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the general figure display 82 indicates a general figure according to the result of the general figure lottery, that is, the result of the general figure lottery. When the result of the regular drawing lottery is a win, both LEDs are finally turned on, such as “□□” (□: on, Δ: off). This lighting mode is a winning symbol and represents a winning. If the result of the lottery drawing is a loss, finally, only the right LED is turned on, such as “■ □”. This lighting mode is a losing symbol, and represents losing. In addition, the lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the ordinary drawing lottery is not limited, and can be appropriately set. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as the losing symbol may be adopted.

  Further, before the general figure is stopped and displayed, the variable figure of the general figure is displayed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variation display mode in the ordinary drawing is a mode in which both LEDs are turned on alternately. It should be noted that the mode of the variable display in the ordinary figure is not particularly limited, and may be appropriately set such that all the LEDs blink at once unless each LED is stopped (displayed in a specific mode). .

2. Next, an electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a game control board 100 for performing control (game progress) related to a game capable of obtaining a game profit, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100 An effect control board 120 for controlling the effect of the effect, an image control board 140 for controlling the image, a payout control board 170 for controlling the payout of the game balls, and power is supplied to the boards 100, 120, 140, 170. A power supply board 190 is attached.

  A power switch 191 is connected to the power board 190. By turning on / off the power switch 191, power on / off is switched.

  In the vicinity of the game control board 100, a set value cylinder 70 for changing a set value described later and a set value switch 71 are provided. The setting value cylinder 70 is provided with an insertion hole 70A into which a dedicated setting key is inserted. When a setting key (not shown) is inserted into the insertion hole 70A, the set value cylinder 70 can be rotated clockwise by 90 degrees from the reference standby state. Then, as described later, the operation of the set value switch 71 becomes effective by rotating the set value cylinder 70 clockwise 90 degrees from the standby state. The set value switch 71 is configured to be able to be pressed. Further, on the surface of the game control board 100, a set value display 87 for displaying a current set value is mounted. The set value display 87 is constituted by a red 7-segment display.

  As shown in FIG. 6, a game control board 100 is mounted with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 101 for controlling the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls a game. In addition, the game which can acquire the game profit to be controlled by the game control board 100 includes a special figure lottery, a special display variable display, a jackpot game, a setting of a game state described later, a general figure lottery, a variable display of the general figure. , Auxiliary games, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 storing a program and a table for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as a work memory, and a game. A game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in the ROM 103 is included.

  The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing a game control main process and a game control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The gaming ROM 103 also includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, A game control table and the like are stored. The gaming ROM 103 may be provided externally.

  The game RAM 104 is provided with a special figure reservation storage unit 105. Here, the special figure suspension storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, when there is a prize in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 of the game ball, special figure reservation can be generated. If the upper limit has not been reached, determination information including various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery or the like is obtained based on the winning. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as a special figure reservation. In the following, the determination information obtained by winning a game ball in the first starting port 11 is referred to as “special figure 1 related determination information”, and is obtained by winning a game ball in the second starting port 12. This determination information is referred to as “special figure 2 related determination information”. In addition, the special figure 1 related determination information and the special figure 2 related determination information are collectively referred to as “special figure related determination information”.

  Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 reservation. On the other hand, the special figure 2 association determination information is stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b of the special figure reservation storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 reservation. The number of the special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the special figure 1 reservation number is set to “4”. Also, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit of the number of special figure 2 reservations is set to “4”.

  Further, the game RAM 104 is provided with a set value storage unit 107 for storing set value data indicating a set value described later.

  Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output from various sensors are input to the game control board 100. The game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

  Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a big winning opening sensor 14a. .

  The general winning opening sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won the general winning opening 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The special winning opening sensor 14a detects a game ball that has won the special winning opening 14.

  Further, various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a set value cylinder sensor 70a and a set value switch sensor 71a.

  The set value cylinder sensor 70a can detect a rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70. When the rotation of the set value cylinder 70 is performed, the set value cylinder sensor 70a detects the rotation of the set value cylinder 70, and outputs a detection signal indicating that the rotation of the set value cylinder 70 is performed. Output to 100.

  On the other hand, the set value switch sensor 71a can detect a pressing operation of the set value switch 71. When the set value switch 71 is pressed, the set value switch sensor 71a detects the pressed operation of the set value switch 71, and outputs a detection signal indicating that the set value switch 71 is pressed, to the game control board. Output to 100.

  The various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric tusol solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric tube solenoid 12s drives the electric tube opening / closing member 12k of the electric tube 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening / closing member 14k of the special winning device 14D.

  Note that the type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game. In addition, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game.

  Further, to the game control board 100, the display devices 8 (special figure display 81, general figure display 82, and special figure reservation display 83) and the set value display 87 are connected. The display control of these displays 8 and the set value display 87 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

  The game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. The card unit CU and the payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and the firing device 72 is connected to the card unit CU. The card unit CU is a device installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and capable of lending a ball based on information on an inserted prepaid card or the like.

  The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and a signal from the connected card unit CU to pay out prize balls and lending balls. The paid out prize balls and the lending balls are detected by a payout sensor 73a for counting them.

  The launch device 72 is a device that launches a game ball. The handle 72k constitutes an operation unit or an input unit that receives an operation for causing the firing device 72 to fire a game ball, and is included in the firing device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a that can detect contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the contact of the player with the handle 72k, and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the firing control circuit 175.

  Further, a knob 72b of a firing volume capable of detecting a rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The launching device 72 drives the launching motor 72m so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the launch volume knob 72b. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

  Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information on the game to the effect control board 120 in accordance with the progress of the game. The effect control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

  Note that the connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a one-way communication connection that can only transmit signals from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as communication direction regulating means is interposed between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120.

  As shown in FIG. 7, on the effect control board 120, an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “effect control microcomputer”) 121 for controlling the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program is mounted. The effect control board 120, together with an image control board 140, an audio control circuit 161, and a sub-drive board 162, which will be described later, can be positioned as an effect control unit that controls effects. However, the effect control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and uses the effect devices (the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, the board movable body 55k, and the like) for a game effect, a customer waiting effect, and an operation promotion. What is necessary is just to be able to control the production and the like.

  In addition, the effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (such as special figure fluctuation effects, hold effects, and jackpot game effects), customer waiting effects, and operations of the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. An operation promotion effect that prompts an operation in a valid period (operation valid period) is included.

  The effect control microcomputer 121 stores an effect ROM 123 storing a program for controlling the effect as the game is advanced by the game control board 100, an effect RAM 124 used as a work memory, and an effect ROM 123. Effect CPU 122 for executing the generated program.

  The effect ROM 123 stores a program for performing effect control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, and 10 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The effect ROM 123 may be external.

  The effect RAM 124 has a start winning command holding storage unit 125 for storing a starting winning command described later, a symbol designating command storage unit 126 for storing a symbol designating command described later, and a special figure change storing a special figure change start command described later. A start command storage unit 127 and a set value flag storage unit 128 for storing a set value flag described later are provided.

  The image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, in accordance with the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Is performed. Note that the connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 can be performed by both transmitting a signal from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmitting a signal from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. Bidirectional communication connection.

  The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 storing a program for image control and the like, an image RAM 143 used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 executing the program stored in the image ROM 142. . Further, the image control board 140 includes a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 storing data of an image to be displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video) used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145. A random access memory (Random Access Memory) 146 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144 are provided. All or some of these electronic components may be configured as one chip.

  The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data or moving image data, specifically, characters, items, designs, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc.) for displaying an image displayed on the image display device 50. Image data (including patterns) and background images).

  The VDP 144 reads out image data from the CGROM 145 and develops it in a development area in the VRAM 146 according to a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 121. Then, the developed image data is appropriately combined and an image is drawn in a frame buffer in the VRAM 146. Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as RGB signals. Thereby, various effect images are displayed on the display unit 50a.

  The display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing in frame units. The display list includes information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position where the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the image transmittance.

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 is based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100, from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 voice, music, and Outputs sound effects and so on.

  Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120. Note that the audio control circuit 161 may be formed of a board and a CPU may be mounted. In this case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

  In addition, various sensors serving as an input unit and various actuators serving as a driving source are connected to the effect control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the effect control board 120. The effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

  Various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k is pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k has been pressed. When detecting that each of the first effect button sensor 40a and the second effect button sensor 41a is operated, the first effect button sensor 40a and the second effect button sensor 41a output a signal corresponding to the detected content to the effect control board 120.

  Note that the type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game. Also, the type and number of the actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed within a range that does not hinder the game.

  The various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 include a rotating member motor 55m1 and a lifting member motor 55m2. The rotating member motor 55m1 can drive the rotating member 55k1 to rotate the rotating member 55k1. The elevating member motor 55m2 can raise or lower the elevating member 55k2. More specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2 via the sub-drive board 162. .

  In the following, the operation of the “rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2” may be collectively referred to as “the operation of the movable platen 55k”. Further, rotating the rotary member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating or lowering or raising the board movable body 55k".

  The effect control microcomputer 121 performs lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub-drive board 162 based on a command or the like received from the game control board 100. In more detail, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (also referred to as lamp data, which determines the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53), and determines the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 53 according to the light emission pattern data. Controls light emission. Note that data stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

  Note that the sub-drive board 162 may be constituted by a board and the CPU may be mounted. In this case, the CPU may control the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like and the operation control of the panel movable body 55k. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and the ROM may store data relating to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern.

3. Next, main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

3-1. Games related to general maps First, games related to general maps will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute a regular drawing lottery when the launched game ball passes through the gate 13. When the general-purpose drawing is performed, the general-purpose display 82 performs variable display of the general-purpose display (stop display after performing the variable display). Here, the stop-displayed general symbols include a hit symbol and a lost symbol. It should be noted that the lost symbol in the ordinary figure is also referred to as a "losed ordinary figure" in order to distinguish it from the lost symbol in the special figure described later.

  When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the lost game is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed and the game related to the passage through the gate 13 ends. In the following, the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal figure or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as “establishment of the variable figure start condition”.

  The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a series of games, such as a general drawing lottery, a variable display of a general figure, and an auxiliary game, by satisfying the general figure changing start condition and acquiring the general figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8 (A), the ordinary symbol related determination information to be acquired includes ordinary symbol random numbers. The normal symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a hit judgment. Each random number has an appropriate range.

3-1-1. The hit determination is a determination for determining whether or not a hit has been made (whether or not to execute an auxiliary game), for example, using a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9A. The hit determination table can be associated with a game state described later. When associated with the gaming state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table used in a non-time saving state (non-time saving hit determination table) and a hit determination table used in a time reduction state (time saving hit determination table).

  In each hit determination table, a determination value of a normal symbol random number (ordinary symbol random number determination value) is appropriately allocated to a hit and a loss as a result of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 checks the acquired normal symbol random numbers against the hit determination table to determine whether a hit or a loss. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the ordinary figure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the loss general figure is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the general figure. Note that the winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal-figure variation pattern determination / figure-variable display The general-figure variation pattern determination is a determination for determining a general-figure variation pattern using a general-figure variation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 9B, for example. The general-figure variation pattern is identification information relating to predetermined items related to variable display of the general-purpose figure such as general-fluctuating time.

  The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time reduction state / time reduction state). When linked to the gaming state (non-time-saving state / time-saving state), the general-purpose variation pattern determination table includes a general-purpose variation pattern determination table (non-time-saving general-purpose variation pattern determination table) used in the non-time-saving state. There is a general-purpose variation pattern determination table (time-saving general-purpose variation pattern determination table) used in the state.

  In each of the general figure fluctuation pattern determination tables, one general figure fluctuation pattern as a result of the general figure fluctuation pattern determination is stored for each general figure to be stopped. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, it is possible to make the normal time fluctuation time different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the general figure when the general figure of the loss (loss general figure) is stopped and displayed is determined to be a general figure variation pattern in which the general figure variation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is determined. For the variable display of the general figure in the case of the stop display, the general figure fluctuation pattern in which the general figure fluctuation time is 30 seconds is determined. Also, in the time saving state, the variable display of the general figure when the lost general figure is stopped and displayed is determined to be a general figure variation pattern in which the general figure variation time is 5 seconds, and the general figure when the hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Is determined to be a general-purpose variation pattern in which the general-purpose variation time is 5 seconds. It should be noted that these ordinary figure fluctuation times can be appropriately changed.

  Then, a variegated display of the general figure fluctuation time associated with the general figure fluctuation pattern determined in the general figure fluctuation pattern determination is performed on the general figure display device 82. In this way, by performing the hit determination and the general-figure variation pattern determination, the general-figure display unit 82 performs variable display of the general-figure.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game The auxiliary game is executed when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (a result of the general figure lottery) in a variable display of the general figure. In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D opens.

  The elements that constitute the auxiliary game (auxiliary game elements) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D opens and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls an auxiliary game using an auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9 (C), it is possible to associate a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time reduction state / time reduction state). The specific content of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

  The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D opens for a first opening time during which it is difficult to make the electric chew 12D win a game ball such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time-saving state, for example, the game ball is awarded to the electric chew 12D for a longer time than the first opening time such as twice opening for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closing) of 1.0 second therebetween. The electric chew 12D opens for a second opening time that is easy to perform.

  In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as “short opening auxiliary game”. On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the time saving state is also referred to as “long opening auxiliary game”. Further, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in the auxiliary game, for example, it is opened a plurality of times in one auxiliary game, such as once opening and then reopening once after an interval of once closing. You may comprise so that it may be.

3-2. Next, a game related to a special figure will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special drawing 1 lottery when the launched game ball wins the first starting port 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 display 81a performs a variable display of the special figure 1 (stop display after performing the variable display) and notifies the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special figure 1 stopped and displayed includes a big hit symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 1 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning ends. When the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the winning ends.

  Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special drawing 2 lottery when the launched game ball wins the second starting port 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 display 81b performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (stop display after performing the variable display) and notifies the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special figure 2 stopped and displayed includes a big hit symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 2 lottery includes a jackpot and a loss.

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the big hit game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning ends. Further, when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the winning ends.

  In the following, a game ball winning in the first starting port 11 is referred to as “establishment of a first starting condition”, and a game ball winning in the second starting port 12 is referred to as “establishment of a second starting condition”. That. Further, "establishment of the first start condition" and "establishment of the second start condition" are collectively referred to as "establishment of the start condition". In addition, the lost symbol of the special symbol is also referred to as a “losing special symbol” in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned ordinary symbol.

  The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a series of games such as a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, and a jackpot game by obtaining a special condition related determination information when a start condition is satisfied. Then, in order to variably display the special figure, various determinations are made on the special figure related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a special figure variation pattern random number.

  The special symbol random number is a random number (determination information) for performing a jackpot determination. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing the jackpot symbol type judgment. The reach random number is a random number (determination information) for performing the reach determination. The special figure variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for performing the variation pattern determination of the special symbol. Each random number has an appropriate range. Next, each determination performed using the special figure related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot determination Jackpot determination is to determine, using a jackpot determination table, whether or not a jackpot game is to be executed (in other words, whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, one of a jackpot and a loss. The big hit determination table can be provided for each set value as shown in FIGS. 10A to 10F, for example. That is, the jackpot determination table can be associated with the set value.

  The set value is a value such as a parameter associated with a probability of being determined as a big hit in the big hit determination (hereinafter, also referred to as a “big hit probability”). As described later, the set value can be set when the game control board 100 is powered on. By operating the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 described above, a set value can be set for each pachinko gaming machine PY1.

  In the basic embodiment, six types of setting values 1 to 6 are set. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used when the set value is “1”, a jackpot determination table used when the set value is “2”, and a jackpot determination table used when the set value is “3”. The jackpot determination table used when the set value is "4", the jackpot determination table used when the set value is "5", the jackpot determination table used when the set value is "5", and when the set value is "6" There is a jackpot determination table used.

  Each of the jackpot determination tables associated with the set values further includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter, referred to as a “normal probability jackpot determination table”) and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state. (Hereinafter, referred to as a “high-probability jackpot determination table”). Note that the type of the set value is not limited to the basic embodiment and can be set as appropriate.

  In each of the jackpot determination tables associated with the set value and the game state, a determination value (special symbol random number determination value) of a special symbol random number is assigned to a jackpot and a loss as a result of the jackpot determination. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired special symbol random number with a jackpot determination table associated with the set value and the game state, and determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) to 10 (F), for each set value, the special symbol random number determination value in which the high probability jackpot determination table is determined to be a large jackpot is greater than the normal probability large jackpot determination table. There are many settings. Furthermore, for the same game state, as the set value becomes higher, the number of special symbol random numbers determined to be a big hit is set more. In other words, the higher the set value is, the easier it is to determine the jackpot.

  Note that the method of distributing the special symbol random value to the jackpot probability or the result of the various jackpot determinations can be appropriately changed.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination The jackpot symbol type determination determines the jackpot symbol type (jackpot symbol type) using a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in, for example, FIG. 11A, when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot. It is to be. It is possible to associate the type of the jackpot symbol with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the components of the jackpot (contents that are advantageous to the player), such as game bonuses given to the player.

  The jackpot symbol type determination table displays the type of the special symbol variably displayed (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, a winning due to the jackpot symbol type determination (which caused the jackpot symbol type determination). It is associated with the type of the starting port (the first starting port 11 / the second starting port 12). That is, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing variable display of the special figure 1 and a jackpot used when performing variable display of the special figure 2. There is a symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table).

  A plurality of jackpot symbols can be set. In each of the jackpot symbol type determination tables, the determination value of the jackpot symbol random number (the jackpot symbol random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type that is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines the type of the big hit symbol by comparing the acquired big hit symbol random number with the big hit symbol type determination table. In the first big hit symbol type determination table and the second big hit symbol type determination table, the big hit symbol random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various big hit symbols.

  The type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 and the type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 2 can be appropriately set. For example, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. There are three types of jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol A, a jackpot symbol B, and a jackpot symbol C, and three types of jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol D, a jackpot symbol E, and a jackpot symbol F, as the jackpot symbol of the special figure 2. Can be provided. Then, like the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 11A, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol random number determination value is appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. I have. In addition, the distribution rate of the big hit symbol type can be appropriately changed. The type of the big hit symbol can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination The reach determination is, for example, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, using a reach determination table as shown in FIG. 11B to determine whether or not to generate a reach in a special figure variation effect described later. Is to decide.

  The reach determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time reduction state / time reduction state). In the case of being related to the game state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table used in a non-time reduction state (a non-time reduction reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in a time reduction state (a time reduction reach). Judgment table).

  In each reach determination table, the reach random number determination value (reach random number determination value) is sorted into the reach reach results "reach present (reach is generated)" and "reach no (reach is not generated)." I have. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 checks the obtained reach random number against the reach determination table to determine whether there is reach or not (whether or not to generate reach).

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the number of reach random number determination values determined as “reach present (reach is generated)” may be different between the non-time reduction reach determination table and the time reduction reach determination table. It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach determination performed on the assumption that the result of the jackpot determination is “losing”, “reach is present (reach is generated)” is referred to as “reach has loss,” and “reach is missing ( "Reach does not occur)" is sometimes referred to as "no reach".

3-2-4. Special figure variation pattern determination The special figure variation pattern determination is performed in a case where the result of the jackpot determination is either a big hit or a loss, for example, a special pattern variation pattern determination table (a special figure variation pattern) as shown in FIGS. That is, a change pattern (variable pattern of a special figure) of the variable display of the special figure is determined using the determination table.

  The special figure change pattern is identification information for identifying a predetermined item related to a special figure change time, a so-called “scale”, and an effect flow (effect contents) of the special figure change effect described later. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern includes identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the jackpot symbol type determination, and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special figure fluctuation time and the production flow (production contents) of the special figure fluctuation production. It is also possible. Note that the type and number of the special figure variation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

  The special figure variation pattern determination table is a type of a special symbol (variable figure 1 / special figure 2) that performs variable display as a determination target, in other words, a start port where a prize is awarded due to the special figure variation pattern determination. It is possible to associate with the type (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). In other words, the special figure variation pattern determination table includes a special figure variation pattern determination table (Special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing variable display of the special figure 1 and a variable display of the special figure 2. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 13) used when performing the determination.

  Each of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination tables can be associated with a gaming state (non-time reduction state / time reduction state). That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table includes a special figure 1 variation pattern determination table (non-time saving special figure 1 variation pattern determination table) used in the non-time saving state and a special figure 1 used in the time reduction state. There is a fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for time saving). On the other hand, similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time saving state and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table) are used in the time reduction state. Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table (special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for time reduction).

  Further, each special figure change pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time reduction state / time reduction state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time saving and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for time reduction have a big hit pattern, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach, respectively. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for non-time saving and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time reduction also include a jackpot pattern, a loss with reach, and a loss without reach.

  Furthermore, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the game state can be associated with the special figure 1 hold number. For example, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the no-reach losing used when the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is 0 to 2 and when the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is 3 to 4 are used. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for losing without reach. Similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the game state can be associated with the special figure 2 suspension number. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the loss without reach used when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 0 to 2 and when the special figure 2 reservation number (U2) is 3 to 4 And a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for reachless loss.

  Then, the special figure display unit 81 performs a variation display of the special figure of the special figure variation time according to the special figure variation pattern determined in each special figure variation pattern determination. Then, if the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special figure variable display (the result of the special symbol lottery) after the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the next special figure is not immediately performed, and subsequently, , A jackpot game is executed.

  Further, it is possible to associate an effect flow of a special figure fluctuation effect as shown in the third column from the right of the tables of FIGS. 12 and 13 with each special figure fluctuation pattern. Here, a description will be given of a representative effect that constitutes an effect flow of a special figure change effect associated with the special figure change pattern.

  The effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure change effect include normal change, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle effects.

  The normal fluctuation indicates that the effect symbols that have been stopped and displayed start to fluctuate, and that each of the effect symbols is displayed at a high speed so that it is difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special figure is started. It is a production to do. And the special figure fluctuation production (part from the start of fluctuation of the design symbol to the fluctuation stop) related to the loss fluctuation without reach, and the part until the reach is established (confirmed) in the special figure fluctuation production in which the reach occurs, are the normal fluctuation. May be composed of

  Immediately after the reach is established (confirmed) through the normal fluctuation, the N-reach is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) at the position where the effect symbol constituting the reach is temporarily stopped, and the remaining one This is an effect in which the effect symbol decelerates and fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The jackpot expected by N reach is higher than normal fluctuation, and lower than L reach and SP reach described later. When the special figure fluctuation effect ends at N reach, the remaining one effect symbol fluctuating at the low speed stops. In the case of a loss, the remaining one effect symbol stops at an effect symbol different from the effect symbol constituting the reach. If the special figure fluctuation effect is not ended in N reach, the remaining one effect design fluctuates again at a high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach or SP reach while maintaining the reach.

  The L-reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N-reach, and is performed for a longer time than the N-reach, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is higher than the N-reach. In the L-reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and a predetermined position (for example, a left-effect symbol EZ1 described later, which does not hinder the background image as compared with the N-reach). In the state where the right effect symbol EZ3 has moved to the upper left of the display unit 50a (upper right of the display unit 50a), the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to L-reach (a video dedicated to L-reach flows). In L reach, an animation image by 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As the L-reach effect contents, an image of a scene different from a game related to SP reach described later is displayed, such as the hero character performing special training in order to learn a special technique.

  The SP reach is, for example, an effect that can be executed after the N reach, is performed for a longer time than the L reach, and indicates that the jackpot expectation is higher than the L reach. In the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and a predetermined position (for example, a left effect symbol EZ1 described later, which does not hinder the background image as compared with the N reach). In the state where the right effect symbol EZ3 has moved to the upper left of the display unit 50a (upper right of the display unit 50a), the background image is switched to a background image dedicated to SP reach (a video dedicated to SP reach flows). In the SP reach, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as the effect of the SP reach, a video of a scene in which the team to which the hero character belongs and the team to which the rival of the hero character belongs is displayed.

  The battle effect is, for example, an effect that can be executed after reaching in a time-saving state, and is an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation degree is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in the battle effect, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced and at a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is the display unit 50a. (Upper right corner), the display switches to a background image dedicated to battle effects (a video dedicated to battle effects flows). In the battle effect, a 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a.

  In the “state in which the reach is maintained” in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle effect, an effect symbol constituting the reach in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle effect is displayed on the display unit 50a. It is assumed that not only the state in which the effect is visible but also the state in which, for example, the effect symbols constituting the reach are difficult or invisible from the display unit 50a for a predetermined period in relation to the dedicated background image. The effects of the normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects can be appropriately changed. Further, the effects constituting the special figure fluctuation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

  In addition, as shown in the second column from the right in the tables of FIGS. 12 and 13, it is possible to name the special figure variation pattern in association with the jackpot determination result and the effect contents of the special figure variation production. . The special figure variation pattern relating to the jackpot may be collectively referred to as “big hit variation”, and the special figure variation pattern relating to the loss may be collectively referred to as “loss variation”.

  Furthermore, the special figure fluctuation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot determination result is "SP reach fluctuation", the special figure fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach fluctuation", and the special figure fluctuation in N reach. The special figure change pattern in which the effect ends may be collectively referred to as “N-reach change”. Further, the loss fluctuation with reach may be referred to as “loss fluctuation with reach”, and the loss fluctuation without reach may be collectively referred to as “normal loss fluctuation”.

3-2-5. Pre-reading judgment The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can make a pre-reading judgment, for example, using a pre-reading judgment table as shown in FIGS. is there. The look-ahead determination table indicates the type of the starting port (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12) related to the starting winning, in other words, the type of special figure (special figure 1 / special figure) variably displayed according to the starting winning. It is possible to associate with 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first starting port 11 is won and the special figure 1 is variably displayed. The first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) and the second starting port 12 are won. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 15) when the variable display of No. 2 is performed. Note that the prefetch determination performed based on the first prefetch determination table is also referred to as “first prefetch determination”, and the prefetch determination performed based on the second prefetch determination table is also referred to as “second prefetch determination”.

  The look-ahead determination table can also be associated with a later-described gaming state (normal gaming state / high-probability high-base gaming state / low-probability high-base gaming state). That is, the look-ahead determination table includes a look-ahead determination table used in the normal game state (a look-ahead determination table for the normal game state) and a look-ahead determination table (the high-probability base game) used in the high-probability high-base game state. There is a state look-ahead determination table) and a look-ahead determination table (low-probability high-base game state look-ahead determination table) used in the low-probability high-base gaming state.

  That is, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, a first look-ahead determination table used in the high probability high base gaming state, and a first look-ahead determination table used in the low probability high base gaming state. A first look-ahead determination table used, a second look-ahead determination table used in a normal game state, a second look-ahead determination table used in a high-probability high-base game state, and a low-probability high-base game state And a second look-ahead determination table used for the above.

  It should be noted that the pre-reading determination using the pre-reading determination tables shown in FIGS. 14 and 15 specifies the special-figure variation pattern related to the variable display of the special-figure performed by winning the starting openings 11 and 12. That is, before the special figure is variably displayed based on the winning, the special figure change pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the prefetch determination result. In the process of specifying the special figure change pattern, the success or failure of the jackpot is also specified as the prefetch determination result. If "big hit" is specified in the prefetch determination, the big hit symbol type is also specified as the prefetch determination result. When the success or failure of the jackpot is specified using the look-ahead determination table, a special symbol random number determination value corresponding to the set value is used.

  Then, the pre-read determination result including the information on the special figure variation pattern and the like is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a prefetch determination result along with its generation. Note that what information is specified as the prefetch determination result can be changed as appropriate.

  As described above, by performing the jackpot determination, the jackpot symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure variation pattern determination, the special figure display 81 performs variable display of the special figure. Then, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result (the result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special figure, the variable display of the next special figure is not performed, and the big hit game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Jackpot games

  The jackpot game includes a plurality of round games with opening and closing of the special winning opening 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game, and a final round game. Of the game from the end of the game to the end of the jackpot game (also referred to as ED). Each round game starts when the opening game ends or the previous round game ends, and ends when the next round game starts or the ending starts.

  Note that it is possible not to provide an OP or ED. In the following, a predetermined number of round games (predetermined order) are simply referred to as “rounds”. For example, the first (first) round game is also called "1 round (1R)", and the 10th round game is also called "10 round (10R)".

  Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the jackpot game using the jackpot game control table. The big hit game control table can be set for each big hit symbol type. That is, the big hit game can be associated with the big hit symbol type. One or more types of jackpot games can be set.

  The big hit game control table stores elements (big hit game components) constituting the big hit game. The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the special winning opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the special winning opening in which each opening is performed, and the time to close until the next opening. (Closing time), opening time (opening time), ending time (ending time), and the like.

  Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can control the big hit game using a big hit game control table as shown in FIG. 16A, for example. That is, it is possible to set the type of the big hit game and the big hit game components for each big hit game as shown in FIG. Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 16A will be described.

  In the big hit game associated with the big hit symbol A (hereinafter, also referred to as “first big hit game”), 10 round games are performed. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first jackpot game.

  In the big hit game associated with the big hit symbol B (hereinafter, also referred to as “second big hit game”), the round game is performed five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the big win port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second jackpot game.

  In the big hit game associated with the big hit symbol C (hereinafter, also referred to as “third big hit game”), the round game is performed five times. In each round game from 1R to 5R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. There is also an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third big hit game to the start of the first round game. In addition, there is an ending in which the big win port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third jackpot game.

  In the big hit game associated with the big hit symbol D (hereinafter, also referred to as “fourth big hit game”), 10 round games are performed. In each round game from 1R to 10R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the big win port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth jackpot game.

  In the big hit game associated with the big hit symbol E (hereinafter, also referred to as “fifth big hit game”), the round game is performed six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Further, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the large winning opening 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth jackpot game.

  In the big hit game associated with the big hit symbol F (hereinafter, also referred to as “sixth big hit game”), the round game is performed six times. In each round game from 1R to 6R, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. Further, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the big win port 14 is kept closed for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the sixth jackpot game.

  In each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected by the special winning opening sensor 14a, even if the maximum opening time of the special winning opening 14 has not elapsed, a large number of playing balls can be obtained. The winning game 14 is closed, and the round game ends. In addition, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be appropriately changed.

  Further, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 16, the type of the jackpot game to be executed is determined by the type of the jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed by a different method. May be. For example, a device that can be allocated to two winning ports is provided in the gaming area 6, and when one of the winning ports is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed. Either a jackpot game consisting of more round games or a jackpot game consisting of less than a predetermined number of round games may be executed at a predetermined probability by lottery or the like.

3-4. Next, a gaming state in which the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is executed, and a non-jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is not executed. The non-jackpot gaming state includes a normal gaming state, which is a basic gaming state, and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Elements that are “advantageous to the player” according to the specific game state include a jackpot probability and the ease with which the second starting port 12 can be opened. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific game state.

  With respect to the jackpot probability, being advantageous to the player means that the jackpot probability is higher than in the normal game state, and the jackpot is more likely to be won. The advantage of the player regarding the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is that the easiness of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the opening of the second starting port 12 per unit time is performed. It means that the time will be longer.

  As the specific game state, the first specific game state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time are advantageous to the player, and the second specific game state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. Only the specific game state and the third specific game state in which only the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is advantageous to the player can be set. Note that all of these three types of specific game states may not be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PY1, but some of the three types of specific game states may be mounted.

  Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal game state and the player has an advantage in the jackpot probability is referred to as a “high probability state”. On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and a state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is referred to as a “normal probability state”.

  Further, as a partial game state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than that in the normal gaming state, A state where the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "time reduction state". On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is referred to as “non-time saving”. State. "

  Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be described in detail. As described above, the opening time of the electric tube 12D per unit time is longer in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which the second starting port 12 can be more easily won than the non-time saving state. Here, a specific method for facilitating winning in the second starting port 12 in a time saving state rather than a non-time saving state will be described.

  For example, by setting the time reduction state to a state in which the normal time fluctuating time is more likely to be shorter than in the non-time reduction state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win in the time reduction state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, in the time-saving state, the general-purpose fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the general-purpose fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time-saving state is set. Let it be determined. As a result, the number of times of performing the general drawing lottery per unit time increases in the time reduction state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit determination and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the general drawing lottery per unit time is performed. As the number of times of execution increases, the opening time of the electric tube 12D per unit time increases.

  In addition, by setting the time-saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is more likely to be longer than that in the non-time-saving state, the second starting port 12 can be more easily won in the time-saving state. . For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. To release seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit determination and the normal time fluctuating time are the same, the number of times of execution of the auxiliary game per unit time becomes equal, so once. Since the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is longer, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

  Furthermore, by setting the time reduction state to a state where it is easier to determine a hit in the hit determination as compared to the non-time reduction state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win in the time reduction state. For example, as described above, in the non-hour reduction state, the hit is determined with a probability of 6600/65536 in the hit determination, whereas in the time reduction state, the hit is determined with a probability of 59936/65536 in the hit determination. . In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the normal time fluctuating time in one auxiliary game are the same, there is a high probability that the hit determination is made as a hit Since the number of times of hit determination per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric tube 12D per unit time increases.

  As described above, in the time reduction state, it is easier to win in a win than in the non-time reduction state, the fluctuating time tends to be shorter, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game tends to be longer. When the three conditions are satisfied, the opening time of the electric tube 12D per unit time is longer in the time reduction state than in the non-time reduction state, and winning in the second starting port 12 can be facilitated. As a result, the so-called “base”, which is the ratio of the number of award balls to the number of launch balls, increases. Therefore, in the time-saving state where the base is high, it is possible to aim at the jackpot winning without greatly reducing the number of game balls possessed as compared with the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time reduction state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time reduction state.

  In the time-saving state, all the three conditions for increasing the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time may not be provided, but only some of the conditions may be provided. Finally, in the time reduction state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time reduction state, and it is only necessary that the winning in the second starting port 12 is facilitated.

  Also, in the time saving state, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed per unit time is small, such as by making it easier to select a special figure variation pattern having a shorter special figure variation time than in the non-time saving state. The average of the figure fluctuation times may be reduced. As a result, in the time reduction state, the pace at which the special figure reservation is consumed is increased, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as the special figure reservation) at the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a jackpot with a smooth progress of the game.

  In the following, the first specific gaming state is referred to as a “high-probability high-based gaming state” and the second specific gaming state is referred to as a “high-probability The base gaming state and the third specific gaming state are also referred to as a “low probability high base gaming state”. Further, the normal game state is also referred to as a “low-probability low-base game state”.

  Therefore, it can be said that the low-probability low-base gaming state is a gaming state controlled in the normal probability state and the non-time saving state. Similarly, the low-probability high-base game state is controlled in the normal probability state and the time-saving state, the high-probability low-base game state is controlled in the high-probability state and the non-time-saving state, and the high-probability high-base game state is controlled in the high-probability state and the time-saving state. Game state.

  In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled in the low-probability low-base gaming state, the low-probability high-base gaming state, the high-probability low-base gaming state, the high-probability high-base gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot game state, the special winning opening 14 is opened for a long time, and a large number of game balls can be obtained. Therefore, the jackpot game state can be said to be a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can also be referred to as an “advantageous gaming state” that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

  The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. is there. The high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the winning of the second starting port 12 is higher than in the non-time saving state. It is a game state. Furthermore, in the jackpot gaming state, the big winning port 14 in which the number of prize balls by one winning is larger than the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12 is opened. This is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the normal gaming state is set first. The big hit game state is set by performing a stop display of the big hit symbol. On the other hand, the specific game state is set by executing a jackpot game by winning a jackpot. Next, the setting of the specific game state will be described.

3-5. Setting of Specific Game State The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can newly set a specific game state with the end of the jackpot game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and advanced in the specific game state. The duration of the specific game state can be set as appropriate. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. Further, it is possible to limit a period in which the specific game state can be continued.

  In the case of limiting the duration of the specific game state, the specific game state can be ended when the end condition for the duration is satisfied. Then, when the specific game state ends, the normal game state can be set. As for the high-probability high-base game state, when the end condition is satisfied, a low-probability high-base game state or a high-probability low-base game state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base game state or high-probability low-base game state may be continued until the next big hit is won. Also, the same or different end conditions may be provided for the newly set low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability low-base game state, and the normal game state may be set when the end condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the end condition for the continuation period of the specific game state can be appropriately set. As the end condition, for example, the number of times of performing the special figure variable display can be set. Further, the present invention is not limited to the number of executions of the special figure variable display, and may include an elapsed time after the jackpot game, the number of shot balls of the game ball after the jackpot game, the number of times of passing to the gate 13 after the jackpot game, or whether to end the specific game state. Derivation of the result of terminating in the lottery for determining whether or not the lottery is performed (so-called “falling lottery”) can be set as the termination condition. Further, these elements may be individually set as the end condition, or may be set in a combined manner.

  Note that these end conditions may be set the same for all the specific game states that can be set after the jackpot game, and may be set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You may. Further, the termination condition may be different for each specific game state.

  Furthermore, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the big hit symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. 16B, the high hit symbol A, the big hit symbol B, the big hit symbol D, or the big hit symbol E after the big hit game related to the big hit game ends. The game may be controlled in the high probability base gaming state. Here, this high-probability, high-base gaming state can be continued until a jackpot is won without providing an end condition. Further, the game may be controlled in the low-probability, high-base game state after the end of the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol F. Here, an end condition can be set for the low-probability-high base game state, and the end condition can be set to 100 special figure variable displays. Note that the relationship between the jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence / absence of an end condition, and the content of the end condition are merely examples, and are not limited thereto.

  Also, paying attention to the jackpot game profit, a jackpot in which the game proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game is also referred to as “high probability jackpot”. Furthermore, a jackpot in which the game progresses in the high probability state and the time saving state after the jackpot game is also referred to as “probable change jackpot”. In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in the normal probability state and the time saving state after the jackpot game is also referred to as “hour saving jackpot”.

4. Next, main effects performed by the pachinko game machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

4-1. Production Mode First, the production mode will be described. The production mode is a division of production (or a high-level concept attribute). The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can set a customer waiting effect mode, a normal effect mode, a positive variation effect mode, a time-saving effect mode, and a big hit effect mode as effect modes.

  In the customer waiting effect mode, the special figure variable display is performed in the “low-probability low-base gaming state”, the “low-probability high-base gaming state”, the “high-probability low-base gaming state”, and the “high-probability high-base gaming state”. This is an effect mode that can be set when there is no display, and indicates a standby state in which special figure variable display is not performed. When the customer waiting effect mode is set, a customer waiting effect is performed. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 17A, a customer waiting demonstration movie G100 introducing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demonstration movie G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 17B, a setting screen G101 for performing settings related to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Is displayed. The settings related to the effects include the volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 52, the brightness setting of the display unit 50a, and the frequency setting of the effect to be executed. Note that the setting items for the effect can be set as appropriate. Further, the setting screen G101 can be prevented from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demo video G100.

  The normal effect mode is an effect mode that can be set in the “low-probability low-base game state” and indicates that the game is in the normal game state. Further, a plurality of lower-level effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode can be provided. For example, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided as lower-level effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode.

  In the following, the effect mode of the lower hierarchy belonging to the effect mode is also referred to as “effect stage”. Accordingly, the first normal production mode is also called “first normal production stage”, the second normal production mode is also called “second normal production stage”, and the third normal production mode is also called “third normal production stage”. Say.

  When a plurality of effect stages belonging to the normal effect mode are provided as described above, the effect stages can be switched sequentially and repeatedly when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate. For example, the switching condition can be set so that a predetermined number of special figure variable effects are performed without winning a jackpot. Furthermore, as the switching condition, it is possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure change effect based on SP reach change is executed.

  Also, as described later, a reach may occur in the special figure fluctuation effect, but the special figure fluctuation effect is established in all sections of the special figure fluctuation effect when the reach does not occur and the reach when the reach occurs. And the latter part after reaching is established when reach occurs. Note that the former part is constituted by the aforementioned “normal fluctuation”.

  Then, in the first stage of the first normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18A: first normal background image G111) mainly representing a city view is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the first stage of the second normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18B: second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the first stage of the third normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18C: third normal background image G113) mainly representing the inside of the restaurant is displayed on the display unit 50a. On the other hand, in the subsequent stage of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and in the normal effect mode. A dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

  The dedicated background image according to the type of the reach in the normal effect mode may be a background image common to the normal effect mode regardless of the type of the effect stage, or may be a different background image for each effect stage.

  Also, the normal effect mode may be set in the “high-probability, low-base game state”, and the normal effect mode may be set to an effect mode indicating that it is a non-time saving state. Alternatively, a predetermined effect mode that is set only in the “high-probability low-base game state” and is different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Further, in the low-probability low-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state generated under a certain condition, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

  The certainty effect mode is an effect mode that can be set in the “high-probability high-base gaming state” and indicates that the game is in the high-probability high-base gaming state. In the preceding stage of the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, a background image representing the universe (a probability variation background image G120) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In the latter part of the certainty effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the certainty effect mode is displayed.

  The time-saving effect mode can be set in the “low-probability high-base game state” or the “high-probability high-base game state”, and is either the low-probability high-base game state or the high-probability high-base game state. This is an effect mode that indicates a state. In the preceding stage of the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18E, a background image (time saving background image G130) representing the sky is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the time saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. . In the latter part of the time reduction effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time reduction effect mode is displayed.

  The time reduction effect mode is set only in the low-probability high-base game state, and may be an effect mode indicating the low-probability high-base game state.

  In addition, as for the normal production mode, a plurality of production stages for the production mode are further provided for any one or both of the probable variation production mode and the time reduction production mode, and when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied, the production stage is switched. You may do it.

  The jackpot effect mode is an effect mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being performed in the “big hit game state”, and is an effect mode indicating that a jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot effect mode, for example, during the opening of the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19 (A), an opening image G1 indicating the start of the jackpot game or a right-hit image G2 prompting “right-hand” on the display unit 50a. Is displayed, and a jackpot opening effect is displayed. In addition, during the opening, a background image (opening background image G200) according to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as the jackpot opening effect on the display unit 50a with the background of the opening image G1 or the right-handed image G2. .

  In the jackpot effect mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19B, the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed on the display unit 50a from the opening, and the round image indicating the number of rounds is displayed. A round effect is performed in which a prize ball number image G4 indicating the number of paid prize balls is displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, on the display unit 50a, the background image (the background for the round) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game with the background of the right-handed image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4 The image G201) is displayed, and BGM according to the type of the big hit game is output from the speaker 52.

  Further, during the ending in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19C, an ending image G5 indicating the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of paid out prize balls are indicated on the display unit 50a. A big hit ending effect in which the total prize ball number image G6 is displayed. In addition, during the ending, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a as a jackpot ending effect on the display unit 50a with the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball number image G6. Is done.

  In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as “jackpot game effect” as the effect executed in the jackpot game. That is, a big hit game effect is performed in the big hit effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation production Next, special figure fluctuation production is explained. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 changes the special figure variation pattern and the special figure lottery result (the big hit determination result, the big hit symbol type determination result, the reach determination result, The special figure fluctuation effect is executed based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result).

  In the special figure variation effect, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed on the display unit 50a so as to be superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the variation display of the effect symbol, the display stops after the effect symbol fluctuates. That is, after the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation time and the effect symbol is performed, the fluctuation is stopped, and the stop display of the effect symbol is performed. Then, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is notified by the stop display of the effect symbol.

  In addition, in the special figure change effect performed on the display unit 50a, it is also possible to use an image other than the change display of the effect symbol. Further, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, various effects devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a board movable device 55, a first effect button device 40, and a second effect button device 41 are used. It is possible to perform figure fluctuation effects.

  Next, an effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a in the special figure fluctuation effect executed according to the special figure variable display will be described. The effect symbol is also identification information for indicating a special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types are provided. In detail, one of the components of the effect symbol constitutes identification information for indicating a special figure lottery result, and a plurality of effect symbols are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (A), the effect symbols may be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect symbols may be provided. Here, the number itself constitutes identification information for indicating a special figure lottery result. The effect symbols composed of numbers 1 to 9 are strictly different images because the numbers are different. Then, the effect symbol of the number “1” is set as the effect symbol G10a. Similarly, the effect symbols of numbers “2” to “9” are effect symbols G10b to G10i. For convenience, when the individual effect symbols 1 to 9 are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as “effect symbol G10”.

  The effect symbols G10 of "3" and "7" are red, and the effect symbols of "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and "9". G10 is blue. That is, a color is also set as a component of the effect design G10. Note that the configuration of the effect symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be changed as appropriate. For example, another component such as a character associated with each number may be added to the effect design G10.

  Subsequently, an effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (B), the left, center and right sides of the display unit 50a which are substantially equally divided into three in the horizontal direction are represented by a left effect symbol region 50b1, a medium effect symbol region 50b2, and a right effect symbol. The region 50b3 can be set. The effect symbol G10 is displayed in any of the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3.

  And especially in the first part of the special figure fluctuation effect, the effect design G10 displayed in the left effect design area 50b1 is collectively referred to as “left effect design EZ1”, and the effect design G10 displayed in the middle effect design area 50b2 is “medium”. The effect symbol EZ2 "and the effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 are collectively referred to as" right effect symbol EZ3 ". That is, in the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3, an effect symbol G10 consisting of numerals 1 to 9 is displayed in common, but the effect symbols are displayed in relative display positions. When G10 is distinguished, it is described as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 20B, a small symbol area 50c for variably displaying small symbols can be provided in one section of the left end (lower left corner) at the lower end of the display unit 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, the small symbol can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special figure. Note that the design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate. For example, when the effect symbol is composed of numbers, the small symbol can be configured by reducing the effect symbol as it is. Further, when the effect symbol is composed of numbers and characters, only the numeral portion can be extracted to constitute a small symbol.

  In FIG. 20 (B), the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c are clearly indicated by a dashed line, but this is the left effect symbol area 50b1, It is described to represent the ranges of the medium effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and are not actually displayed.

  Further, as described above, the effects that constitute the effect flow of the special figure fluctuation effect include normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effects. Here, some of these will be described.

4-2-1. Normal Fluctuation The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform normal fluctuation first in the special figure fluctuation effect. The normal fluctuation functions as an effect indicating that the variable display of the special map has started. Next, the normal fluctuation will be specifically described. As the small symbols, small symbols KZ1, small symbols KZ2, and small symbols KZ3 corresponding to the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol region 50c.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 21A, a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a, and a small left symbol KZ1, a small intermediate symbol KZ2, and a right small symbol are displayed. When the variable display of the special figure is started from a state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and the variable display of the special figure is not performed and the variable display of the special figure is on standby, FIG. As shown in the figure, the special figure fluctuation effect is started with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

  The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are displayed at a high speed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically provided on the background side such as the background images G111 to G115. Is displayed with transparency that is easy to see.

  When the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure variation pattern of the loss without reach (for example, the normal loss variation), the variable display of the special figure ends without the occurrence of the reach (the special figure variation). Of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is displayed with a losing eye (a so-called “barrier eye”) peculiar to the reachless losing.

  Toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 21C, the left effect symbol EZ1 is temporarily stopped at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then shown in FIG. 21D. Thus, the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops at the substantially center position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. 21 (E), the middle effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at the substantially center position in the vertical direction.

  Then, finally, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 temporarily stopped in a state of being arranged in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the up-down direction completely stop as they are simultaneously as shown in FIG. The determination is made (the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed). When the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped completely stop at the disjointed eyes, that is, when the stop symbols of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are connected to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Stopping is performed at the same time at the same variation, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed.

  In the example of FIG. 21, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3 → the middle effect symbol EZ2, but are temporarily stopped. The embodiment is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate.

  On the other hand, if the special figure change pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure change pattern of the losing with reach (for example, N losing change), the same as in the case without the above-described reach, the display unit 50a displays FIG. As shown in A), the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the middle and small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 22 (B), the variable display of the special symbol starts, and the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the middle small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3. Is started.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 related to the number “5” temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then, as shown in FIG. The right effect symbol EZ3 relating to “5” is temporarily stopped side by side in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and reaches a reach (reach occurs or is established). Even if the reach is achieved in the effect symbol, the variable display of the small left symbol KZ1, the small and medium symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is continuously performed.

  In the example of FIG. 22, when the reach is established, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3, but the mode of the temporary stop is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. Can be. Further, the number of the effect symbols constituting the reach is not limited to “5”. Further, the temporary stop position is not limited to the substantially center position in the vertical direction. The direction in which the effect symbols constituting the reach are arranged is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

  As described above, the entire period of the special figure fluctuation effect in the case of the loss without the reach and the section from the start of the special figure fluctuation effect in the case where the reach occurs to the time when the reach is established have the normal fluctuation.

4-2-2. N-reach The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform N-reach when the reach is established after the normal fluctuation. The N-reach is an effect that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a “big hit”, and functions as an effect for making the player expect a big hit. Next, N reach will be specifically described.

  When the reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 22D, N reach is performed from that point. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 23A, a state in which reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), the medium effect symbol EZ2 displaying a variable display (scroll) at a high speed in a normal mode gradually decelerates.

  If the special figure variation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure variation pattern of a loss with reach (for example, N loss variation), the middle effect symbol EZ2 is temporarily stopped at a substantially central position in the vertical direction from the state where the reach is established. Then, the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 23 (C), the middle effect symbol EZ2 consisting of a numeral different from the numeral constituting the reach (“4” in FIG. 23 (C)) is temporarily stopped. I do. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state as shown in FIG. The left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

  Further, when the temporarily stopped effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are completely stopped at the losing eye peculiar to the losing with reach, that is, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. However, at the same time, the same symbols as the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped at the same loss point specific to the loss with reach, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are also stopped and displayed. The contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

  If the special figure fluctuation effect is not ended in N reach, the remaining one effect design fluctuates again at a high speed, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach or SP reach while maintaining the reach.

4-2-3. SP Reach The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. SP reach is a production that suggests that the possibility of the special drawing lottery result being a "big hit" is higher than N reach and L reach, and functions as a production to make the player expect a big hit. . Note that the established reach is also maintained in the SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 24A, at the start of the SP reach, the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced and the small size on the display unit 50a is reduced. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the symbol area 50c (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is at the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is at the upper right of the display unit 50a).

  At the start of the SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 24A, a background image dedicated to the SP reach (SP reach background image G115) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and an enemy character appears. As shown in FIG. 24B, an image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has been started is displayed in the center of the display unit 50a. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach, "take an enemy batter OO in FIG. 24 (B)!", And an effect image G11b that complements the title image G11a. You.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 24C, a scene in which the main character and an enemy character that is a rival of the main character confronts each other is displayed. The content of the SP Reach consists of a baseball pitcher and batter confrontation scene. Here, the main character is a pitcher and the enemy character is a batter.

  Thereafter, in the SP reach background image G115, the main character throws the ball as shown in FIG. 25A, and the ball advances toward the enemy character as shown in FIG. As shown in C), the enemy character starts swinging the bat. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 25D, the ball and the bat approach each other, and a situation is reached in which the hero character and the enemy character are about to confront each other. This scene constitutes a turning point (win / loss turning point) where the main character wins or loses in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter.

  After the winning / losing branch point, if the special figure change pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure change pattern of a big hit (for example, SP big hit change), as shown in FIG. After the enemy character wins the confrontation by swinging, the hero character who strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound is displayed as shown in FIG. A predetermined sound effect is output. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

  In this way, the display of the hero character screaming as a result of victory in the confrontation and the output of the predetermined sound effect constitute an effect for notifying a jackpot (a jackpot notification effect). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

  On the other hand, if the special figure change pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure change pattern of the losing with reach (for example, SP losing change) after the winning / losing branch point, the SP reach background is not performed without the jackpot notification effect. In image G115, an image in which the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation as shown in FIG. 26 (A-2), and the main character is discouraged on the mound as shown in FIG. 26 (B-2) Loss notification production with flowing is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (C-2), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with the reach loss. The content of the SP reach is not limited to the content in which the characters confront each other in baseball, but can be changed or added as appropriate.

  Next, the movable body effect and the operation effect performed in the special figure fluctuation effect will be described. The movable body effect and the operation effect are performed as a part of these effects in a form incorporated in the above-mentioned SP reach, N reach, and jackpot game effects, and when they are performed independently of these effects There is. First, the movable body effect will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is capable of performing a movable body effect accompanying the operation of the movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure fluctuation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body effect is an effect using a movable device such as the board movable device 55, and functions as an effect indicating a jackpot expectation degree or a development to SP reach.

  For example, when the movable body effect functions as an effect suggesting the development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), in the special figure fluctuation production, when developing from N reach to SP reach, first, as shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the panel movable device 55 operates, and the panel movable body 55k descends to the operating position in a front view, and is held at that position for a predetermined time. Then, as shown in FIG. 27C, the board movable body 55k moves up to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the panel movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, a scene in which the main character is displayed in a large size on the display unit 50a is displayed, and the screen reaches the SP reach. The operation of the movable device in the movable body effect can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation production Next, the operation production will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 produces an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect corresponding to an operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, or the like at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure fluctuation effect or a jackpot game effect. It is possible to perform operation effects including The operation promotion effect is an effect that prompts the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result effect is an effect performed in accordance with the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion effect. Functions as a production.

  For example, as described above, when the win / loss branch point is reached in the SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (first effect button operation valid period) occurs, and the first effect button operation valid period is generated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 28A, an effect for prompting the operation of the first effect button 40k (first effect button operation promoting effect) is performed.

  In the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button operation promotion image G12 is displayed on the display unit 50a. The first effect button operation promotion image G12 includes an image (first effect button image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k and an image (press operation image) representing an operation mode (that is, a pressing operation) of the first effect button 40k. G12b and an image (first effect button operation effective period remaining time image) G12c indicating the remaining time of the operation effective period (first effect button operation effective period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k.

  Note that the first effect button operation effective period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first effect button operation effective period as time elapses. Changes to FIG. 28B illustrates a state in which the first effect button operation effective period has occurred and a time equal to １ ／ of the first effect button operation effective time has elapsed.

  Then, if the special figure change pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure change pattern of a big hit (for example, SP big hit change), after the first effect button 40k is pressed down in the first effect button operation effective period, Alternatively, after the remaining time of the first effect button operation effective period runs out without operating the first effect button 40k in the first effect button operation effective period, the operation result effect is performed.

  As an operation result effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 28 (C), the board movable device 55 is operated, the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, is held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 Rotates for a predetermined time. As described above, the operation result effect includes the movable body effect. Further, at this time, a normal effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the board movable body 55k is also displayed on the entire display unit 50a as the operation result effect. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (D), the normal effect image G13 is deleted, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the operation result effect is ended by the rise of the board movable body 55k. When the operation result effect ends, a jackpot notification effect is performed.

  On the other hand, if the special figure change pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a special figure change pattern of a loss with reach (for example, SP loss change), the first effect button 40k is pressed down during the first effect button operation effective period. Alternatively, even if the first effect button 40k is not pressed and the remaining time of the effect button operation effective period runs out, the operation result effect is not performed, and the loss notification effect is performed.

  The operation result effect is not limited to the operation of the panel movable device 55 or the display of the normal effect image G13, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Further, the operation effect is not limited to the special figure fluctuation effect, but can also be executed in a jackpot effect.

4-5. Next, a prefetch effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display to be held in the special figure is executed will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a look-ahead effect for a special figure 1 hold or a special figure 2 hold in which no special figure lottery is performed based on the result of the look-ahead determination at an arbitrary timing of the special figure fluctuation effect. is there. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests a jackpot expectation degree for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold, and functions as an effect that expects a big hit before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the hold. As an example of the pre-reading effect, there is a reservation icon notice using a reservation effect representing a special figure reservation. Here, the hold effect performed in the normal effect mode and the hold icon notice will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (A), the holding effect is performed in a holding display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section at the lower end of the display unit 50a. The suspended display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by substantially equally dividing the suspended display area 50d into four in the left-right direction. That is, in the reserved display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are provided in order from the left end to the right end.

  In the first area 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is generated first based on the special figure 1 relation random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation that is generated first among the reserved special figure 1 reservations. A hold icon indicating the special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second area 50d2 to the fourth area 50d4, the second to fourth occurrences of the reserved special figure 1 reservation are generated based on the special figure 1 relation random number corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation. Second to fourth, a hold icon indicating a special figure 1 hold in which the special figure 1 variable display is performed is displayed.

  In the following, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 1." Similarly, the special figure 1 reservation corresponding to the reservation icon displayed in the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 is referred to as “special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 2” and “special reservation 1 in reservation order 3”. Special figure 1 reservation "and" special figure 1 reservation in reservation order 4 ". That is, the existing special figure 1 reservations are referred to as “reservation order 1” to “reservation order 4” in the order in which they occurred.

  Further, the variable display area 50e is formed on the left of the reserved display area 50d. In the change display area 50e, a change icon representing the special figure 1 change display currently being executed is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the change icon displayed in the change display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, is the “hold effect” corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. Is not included, but since the display of the hold icon and the display of the change icon are related, in the following, the display of the hold icon and the display of the change icon are collectively referred to as “hold effect”. . The hold icon and the change icon are collectively referred to as an “icon”.

  In FIG. 29A, the reserved display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are clearly indicated by alternate long and short dash lines, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are clearly indicated by broken lines. It is described to represent the range of the first region 50d1 to the fourth region 50d4 and the variable display region 50e, and is not actually displayed.

  Next, a specific example of the holding effect will be described. In the following description, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that special figure 1 change display is being performed (special figure change production is being performed), and the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is “2”. Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 29B, in the first area 50d1 (not shown) described above, the special figure 1 reservation that occurred first among the currently reserved special figure 1 reservations (reservation order). A special icon 1 reservation (reservation order 2) is displayed next to the special figure 1 reservation that is indicated by the special icon 1 indicated by the reservation icon HA2 in the second area 50d2 (not shown). (Holding of special figure 1) is displayed. Further, in the above-mentioned not-shown change display area 50e, a change icon HA1 indicating the special figure 1 change display currently being executed is displayed. The display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 29B is a normal mode.

  As described above, in the hold effect, the special figure 1 is displayed side by side from the left end to the right of the hold display area 50d in the order of occurrence of the hold. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbol, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbol based on the special figure related determination information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 105 is individually displayed as a reserved icon. You.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the change icon HA1 indicating the special figure change display that is being executed until immediately before is stopped. Subsequently, when the special symbol variable display (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold indicating the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 shift. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) becomes It moves to the illustrated first area 50d1. That is, the displayed hold icons HA2 and HA3 are shifted one by one to the left. In this case, the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the reserved icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 reserved indicated by the reserved icon HA3 is the special figure 1 reserved that is the earliest of the currently reserved special figure 1 reserved. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation in response to the next special figure variable display to be started.

  Further, since the suspension icon HA2 displayed in the variable display area 50e represents the special figure 1 variable display being executed, it becomes the variable icon HA2 when displayed in the variable display area 50e. That is, as a word preceding the “icon”, the icon displayed in the hold display area 50d is set to “hold”, and the icon displayed in the change display area 50e is set to “change”. In other words, if the start condition of the special symbol change display for the special figure hold indicated by the hold icon is satisfied while the hold icon is displayed, the special symbol change display related to the establishment of the start condition is performed. The corresponding hold icon is displayed as a change icon. When the icon is changed from the hold icon to the change icon, in other words, when the icon moves from the hold display area 50d to the change display area 50e, the icon is approximately doubled.

  Then, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 from this situation and a special figure 1 hold occurs, a new hold is performed according to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold as shown in FIG. The icon HA4 is displayed in the above-described second area 50d2 (not shown).

  By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes winning / wrong information and special figure variation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can display the hold icon in the normal mode or the special mode based on the winning / failing information and the special figure change pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special mode is referred to as “hold icon notice”.

  When the display mode of the hold icon is the special mode, that is, when the hold icon notice is given, the player can have an expectation that the jackpot may be won by the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. . Next, a specific example of the reserved icon notice will be described. As a specific example of the reserved icon notice, the display mode of the reserved icon HA4 shown in FIG.

  As one type of the reservation icon notice, a special mode is set immediately after the reservation icon is displayed. In other words, the reservation icon notice is performed when the special figure 1 reservation occurs (at the time of winning the first starting port 11). There is a pending icon notice type. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 29 (D)), and the special figure 1 hold Occurs, the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold, as in the case of FIG. 29 (E).

  Immediately thereafter, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 30 (B)) (hold icon preview is performed). In addition, in the example of FIG. 30, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after being displayed. However, the hold icon HA4 may be displayed in the special mode, and the period in which the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

  As another type of the reserved icon notice, there is a reserved icon notice type in which the reserved icon change notice is performed when the reserved icon moves, in other words, the reserved icon change notice is performed at the time of shifting of the special figure 1 reservation. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), a game ball wins in the first starting port 11 from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 29 (D)), and the special figure 1 hold Occurs, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the reserved icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 31 (B)) changes to the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown) in response to the occurrence of the reservation of the special figure 1. Will be displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 31C, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the change icon HA2 indicating the special figure change display that is being executed until immediately before is stopped. Subsequently, when the variable display (special-figure variation effect) of the special symbol is started based on the special figure 1 reservation indicated by the reservation icon HA3, as shown in FIG. 31 (D), the special symbol is displayed in the first area 50d1. The reserved icon HA3 moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the reserved icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 moves to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31D) (the hold icon preview is performed). ).

  Also, a plurality of types of special modes related to the reserved icon notice can be provided so that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is a normal mode, and green, red, and gold are special modes. Then, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold icon can be set so as to increase in the order of white <green <red <gold.

  The pre-reading effect can be performed on both or one of the special figure 1 reservation and the special figure 2 reservation. The pre-reading effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA. For example, an image other than the hold icon HA on the display unit 50a such as a background image, sound output from the speaker 52, light emission by the frame lamp 53, and movement of the board It is possible to execute using an effect device other than the image display device 50, such as an operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as a production mode of the look-ahead production, in addition to the production mode that is executed like a preliminary notice of a change of the reserved icon by the reserved icon HA and continues without interruption until the special figure change display is started, the production pattern is stopped. An effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as each time display is performed or each time the effect symbol change display is started, may be used.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 101 [game control main processing]
Next, control of a game by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. The flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. As for a plurality of processes in the flowchart, the execution order can be appropriately changed or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as the process contents do not cause inconsistency.

  In addition, counters, timers, flags, statuses, buffers, and the like appearing in game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104. The initial value of the counter is “0”, the initial value of the flag is “0”, that is, “OFF”, and the initial value of the status is “1”.

  When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 190 to the game control board 100, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the game control main processing program shown in FIG.

  As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, the game control microcomputer 101 firstly prohibits interruption (S1), and then sets access to the game RAM 104 to permission (S2). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether a setting value setting operation for setting a setting value is performed (S3). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value cylinder 70 is rotated from the reference state and the set value switch 71 is pressed. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the setting value setting operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S4, and if it determines that the setting value setting operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S7, where the setting value for setting the setting value is set. After performing the setting process, the process proceeds to step S8. The setting value setting process will be described later.

  In step S4, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a setting process of the game RAM 104 for setting an initial value in a use area of the game RAM 104 requiring the initial value, and in step S5, issues a power restoration command to the game RAM 104. The set value is set in the output buffer and transmitted to the effect control board 120. In step S6, the set value indicated by the set value data stored in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is displayed on the set value display 87. Proceed to S10.

  Also, in step S8, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the used area of the game RAM 104 and performs a setting process of the game RAM 104 for setting an initial value in a used area of the game RAM 104 requiring an initial value. In step S9, a RAM clear command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120.

  The game control microcomputer 101 performs a CTC activation setting process for setting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit: a circuit for managing an interrupt time) and the like to be used in step S10, and permits an interrupt in step S11.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes a normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process in step S12. In the ordinary symbol / special symbol main random number updating process, the counter values of various random numbers related to the ordinary symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information are updated by adding one. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the initial value of the counter of each random number may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. At least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process ends, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the power has been cut off in step S13. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 190. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power is not shut off, the process proceeds to step S12. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply has been cut off, the game control microcomputer 101 prohibits the interruption in step S14, prohibits the access to the game RAM 104 in step S15, and stores the data stored in the game RAM 104. Is stored as backup data, and then the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is cut off.

[Setting value setting process]
Next, the setting value setting process (S7) will be described with reference to FIG. In the set value setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 first stores the set value data backed up in the game RAM 104 in the set value storage unit 107 in step S51, and sets the set value indicated by the set value data. It is displayed on the value display 87 (S51).

  Next, in step S52, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value switch 71 has been operated. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the set value switch 71 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S55. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the set value switch 71 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S53. The set value indicated by the set value data stored in 107 is increased by "1" to set a new set value, and the new set value is displayed on the set value display 87 in step S54.

  In the basic embodiment, the set value is set in six steps from 1 to 6, and when the set value switch 71 is operated when the set value is “6”, the set value “1” is newly set. Will be. The manner of change of the set value by operating the set value switch 71 is not limited to “1” increase, but may be “1” decrease or a random change.

  In step S55, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a setting value determination operation for determining the setting value has been performed. Specifically, based on the set value cylinder sensor 70a, the game control microcomputer 101 turns off the set value cylinder 70, that is, determines whether the set value cylinder 70 has been rotated from the set state and returned to the basic state. Determine whether or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is no operation for setting the set value, the process proceeds to step S52, and if it is determined that the operation for setting the set value has been performed, the microcomputer 101 stores the set value in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 in step S56. The set value designation command indicating the set value indicated by the set value data is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120, and the set value setting process is completed, and the process returns to the game control main process.

  In addition, since the set value setting process is completed and the set value is determined by performing the rotation operation of shifting the set value cylinder 70 from the set state to the reference state according to step S55, the set value is determined. It can be positioned as an operation for causing On the other hand, the rotation operation for setting the set value cylinder 70 from the reference state to the set state in step S3 can be regarded as an operation for setting the set value. In the following, the former operation is referred to as “set value setting operation” of the set value cylinder 70, and the latter operation is referred to as “set value setting operation” of the set value cylinder 70.

[Game control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control timer interrupt process will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the game control board 100, and thereby the game control timer interrupt shown in FIG. Execute the process.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 101 first executes an output process (S101) in the game control timer interrupt process. In the output process, a command or the like set in an output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below is output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

  In the input process (S102) performed subsequent to the output process, the game control microcomputer 101 captures a detection signal from a lower plate full switch for detecting whether the surplus sphere storage hole 35A is full, and stores the detection signal in the game RAM 104 as lower plate full data. Store in output buffer.

  The normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process performed in the game control main process of FIG. In other words, the updating process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general figure-related determination information and the special figure-related determination information is performed during the execution period of the game control-side timer interrupt process and during the other period (after the end of the game control-side timer interrupt process). , A period until the next game control side timer interrupt process is started).

  Subsequent to the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), subsequently performs a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). The sensor detection processing, the normal operation processing, and the special operation processing will be described later.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107), and ends the game control timer interrupt processing. As other processing, updating of a timer provided in the game RAM 104 is performed. In addition, as another process, a payout control process of paying out a prize ball to a player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12, the prize ball counter for the special winning port 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning port 10 are " A check is made to see if it exceeds 0, and if it exceeds 0, a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when transmitting the prize ball signal, an update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processing of steps S13 to S14 of the game control main process until the next interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102. When the clock pulse is input, the game control microcomputer 101 again executes the game control. Executes side timer interrupt processing. In the output process (S101) of the game control timer interrupt process executed again, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs the command set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control timer interrupt process. .

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, the sensor detection processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If a game ball has not won the general winning opening 10 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203. If a game ball has won the general winning opening 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls General winning opening prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, “3”) corresponding to the winning in the general winning opening 10 is added to the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 10.

  In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), it is determined whether or not the normal operation status described later = 1, in other words, whether the normal figure variable display or the auxiliary game is not performed. It is determined whether or not it is (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S207. If the normal operation status is 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F) Is acquired as the general symbol related determination information (S205), the acquired general symbol related determination information is stored in the general symbol holding storage unit 86 provided in the game RAM 104 (S206), and step S207 is performed. Proceed to.

  In step S207, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the second starting port 12, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not won the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has won the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), a predetermined game ball is set. The second starting port prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, “4”) corresponding to winning in the second starting port 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12.

  Next, when the number of special figure 2 reservations (specifically, the value of a counter (special figure 2 reservation number counter) for counting the number of special figure 2 reservations provided in the game RAM 104) is equal to or more than "4" (upper limit storage number). It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to or more than “4” (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214. If the special figure 2 reservation number is not “4” or more (less than “4”), (NO in S209), the special figure 2 reservation number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 reservation number adding process, the special figure 2 reservation number counter is incremented by “1”, and the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b is increased by “1”.

  Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special figure variable pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP) ) Is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S211).

  Next, a second prefetch determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the current game state is compared with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 reservation storage unit 105b (S213).

  Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the first starting port 11, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the first starting port sensor 11a. If a game ball has not won the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221. If a game ball has won the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), a predetermined game ball is set. The first start opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, “4”) corresponding to winning in the first starting port 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11.

  Next, the number of special figure 1 reservations (specifically, the value of a counter (special figure 1 reservation number counter) for counting the number of special figure 1 reservations provided in the game RAM 104) is equal to or more than "4" (upper limit storage number). Is determined (S216). If the number of reserved special figure 1 is equal to or more than "4" (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221. If the number of reserved special figure 1 is not more than (less than) "4" (NO in S216). ), A special figure 1 reserved number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 reservation number adding process, the special figure 1 reservation number counter is incremented by "1", and the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a is increased by "1".

  Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special figure variable pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP) ) Is acquired and stored in the special figure related determination information buffer provided in the game RAM 104 (S218).

  Next, a first prefetch determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, the current game state is compared with the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in a storage area of the special figure 1 reservation storage unit 105a according to the current special figure 1 reservation number (S220).

  In step S221, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the special winning opening 14, that is, whether or not a game ball has been detected by the special winning opening sensor 14a. If no game ball has won the special winning opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated. If a game ball has won the special winning opening 14 (YES in S221), the game RAM 104 It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided special winning opening winning counter is "9" or more (S222). The special winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winning in the special winning opening 14 in one round game of the jackpot game. Note that the special winning opening winning counter is cleared each time a round game ends. In the basic embodiment, the winning number is set to “8”. Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

  If the counter value of the special winning opening winning counter is equal to or greater than "9" (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated, and the counter value of the special winning opening winning counter is not equal to or greater than "9", that is, less than "9". (NO in S222), the counter value of the special winning opening winning counter is incremented by "1" (S223), and a special winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), The sensor detection processing ends. In the special winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, “14”) according to the winning in the special winning opening 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the special winning opening 14.

  Note that sensors other than the sensors 10a to 14a are provided as sensors capable of detecting game balls, and based on the fact that the sensors have detected game balls, processing other than the processing shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 is performed. Is also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, a normal operation process related to control of the general-purpose indicator 82 and the electric chew 12D will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing related to the general-purpose indicator 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, “normal operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4” is assigned to each of these statuses. In the normal operation process (S105), the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "normal operation status" (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", a normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", a normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed. When the “normal operation status” is “3”, the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the “normal operation status” is “4”, the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. The “normal operation status” is set to “1” by default.

  The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby in which the variable display of the normal symbol and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the ordinary symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is made based on the ordinary symbol random numbers stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage unit 86. Further, a general-figure change pattern is determined based on the current game state to determine a general-figure change pattern, and the general-figure change display of the general-figure change time of the general-figure change time according to the determined general-figure change pattern. And changes the normal operation status to “2”. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a general figure change start command according to the general figure change pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the time of starting the general figure change display.

  The normal symbol change process (S1103) is a process performed when a normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In the normal symbol variation process (S1103), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the general symbol has elapsed since the start of the variation display of the running general symbol (whether or not the variation display of the general symbol ends). If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the stoppage of the ordinary figure is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to “3”. Also, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a general figure change stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the general figure change display.

  The normal symbol determination process (S1104) is a process performed when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol determination process (S1104), it is determined whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the stoppage display of the running general figure (whether the stop display of the general figure ends). No), and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether the stop-displayed general symbol is a hit symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stop-displayed ordinary symbol is a lost symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an auxiliary game start command in an output buffer of the game RAM 104 when the auxiliary game is started.

  The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process performed when an auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game ends, the normal operation status is changed to “1”.

[Special operation processing]
Next, a special operation process related to the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure reservation display 83, and the special winning device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing relating to the special figure display 81, the special figure reservation display 83, and the special winning device 14D is divided into six statuses (stages). “Special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5” is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first checks the "special operation status" (S1501).

  When the “special operation status” is “1”, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a special symbol standby process (S1502), and when the “special operation status” is “2”, the special symbol change is performed. The process (S1503) is performed. If the "special operation status" is "3", the special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed. If the "special operation status" is "4", the big hit game control is performed. The process (S1505) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "5", a game state setting process (S1506) is performed. The “special operation status” is set to “1” by default.

  The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby in which a special symbol is variably displayed and a jackpot game is not performed. The special symbol standby processing will be described later in detail.

  The special symbol change process (S1503) is a process performed when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The special symbol change processing will be described later in detail.

  The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol determination processing will be described later in detail.

  The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in a jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game control process, thereby performing a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table. When the big hit game ends, the special operation status is changed to “5”. When each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. When all round games are completed and ending is started, an ending command indicating an ending corresponding to the big hit symbol related to the big hit game is set in an output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

  The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting a game state to be controlled after the big hit game when the big hit game ends. For example, when controlling in the high probability state after the jackpot game, the high probability flag is turned on in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Further, at this time, when the duration of the high probability state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the termination condition of the high probability state is the number of times of performing the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter, referred to as a “high probability prescribed number”) is set in a high probability remaining number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. . When controlling in the time saving state after the jackpot game, the time saving flag is turned on in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Further, at this time, when the duration of the time reduction state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of times the special figure variable display is executed, the number of times (hereinafter, referred to as “specified number of time savings”) is set in a time saving remaining number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104.

  In the game state setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating the game state after the jackpot game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special symbols 2 is “0” (S1601). When the special figure 2 reservation number is “0” (YES in S1601), that is, when there is no storage of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to winning in the second starting port 12, the special figure 2 It is determined whether the number of 1 suspension is “0” (S1608). If the number of reserved special figure 1 is also “0” (YES in S1608), that is, if there is no storage of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to winning in the first starting port 11, It is determined whether the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer waiting flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol waiting process is completed, and if the customer waiting flag is not ON (NO in S1618), a customer waiting command is set in the output buffer (S1619). Then, the customer waiting flag is set to ON (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process ends.

  Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is “0” but the special figure 1 reservation number is not “0” (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start-up is performed. If there is at least one storage of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning in the mouth 11, the special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and the special figure 1 change pattern determination processing (S1610) are performed.

  In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the special symbol random number stored first in the special figure 1 holding storage unit 105a is read out, and the big hit determination table associated with the current set value is read out. Among them, based on the big hit determination table associated with the gaming state, it is determined whether it is a big hit or a loss (big hit determination).

  Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot symbol random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined (the jackpot symbol type determination) based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table. Then, the big hit symbol data indicating the big hit symbol type is set in a special figure buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the symbol designation command indicating the big hit symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is "losing", the loss design data representing the loss is set in the special figure buffer, and the design specification command representing the loss is set in the output buffer.

  Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is currently in the non-time saving state (S1651). If it is in the non-time saving state (YES in S1651), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is selected (S1652), and the process proceeds to step S1654. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

  In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the big hit determination result is "big hit". If it is not a jackpot (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a jackpot (YES in S1654), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 is used for the big hit symbol. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

  In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read, and the reach random number is checked against a reach determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (non-time reduction state / time reduction state) to determine whether there is reach or not.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is "there is a reach" (S1656). If there is a reach (YES in S1656), a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for reach loss is selected from the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). After that, the process proceeds to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of reserved special figure 1 is checked, and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 is determined. Then, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the reachless loss according to the number of special figure 1 reservations is selected (S1657), and the process proceeds to step S1660.

  In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads the special figure variation pattern random number, and compares the special figure variation pattern random number with the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1659. The special figure 1 fluctuation pattern is determined to determine the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a special figure 1 change start command indicating the determined special figure 1 change pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and sets the special figure change corresponding to the determined special figure 1 change pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing ends, and the processing returns to the special symbol standby processing.

  The special operation timer is updated for 4 ms in other processing in the game control timer interrupt processing. The set special figure 1 change start command includes information on the type of the special symbol (that is, the special figure 1) and the special figure change pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 change pattern determination process (S1610). Information about the result (information on a special figure variation pattern including information on the presence or absence of a reach and special figure variation time) is included.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 display 81a to start displaying the fluctuation of the special figure 1 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). .

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a by one to the side where it is read from the current position, and also shifts the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a. A special figure 1 hold storage unit shift process is performed to clear the storage area (storage area farthest from the read side) corresponding to the first hold in step (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 is digested in the order in which the reservations are retained.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts “1” from the special figure 1 reservation number counter (S1613), and decreases the special figure 1 reservation number indicated by the special figure 1 reservation display 83a by “1” and changes it ( (S1614), the special operation status is changed to “2” (S1615).

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616). If it is ON (YES in S1616), the game controlling microcomputer 101 turns off the customer waiting flag (S1617), and performs a special symbol standby process. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process ends without executing Step S1617.

  In addition, if the number of reserved special figure 2 is not “0” in step S1601 (NO in step S1601), that is, one or more pieces of special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to winning in the second starting port 12 are stored. If there is, the special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and the special figure 2 change pattern determination processing (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 determination processing (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) have basically the same processing contents as the special figure 1 determination processing (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (S1610). .

  The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically the same as that of the second big hit symbol determination table except that the table used in the big hit determination is the second big hit symbol determination table and the table used in the big hit symbol type determination is the second big hit symbol type determination table. Is the same as the special figure 1 determination processing (S1609), and the description is omitted. Also, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing (S1603) is basically the same as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing (except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table). Since the processing is the same as that in step S1610), description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure fluctuation pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of the various counter values in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b by one to the side where it is read from the current position, and also shifts the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b. The special figure 2 suspension storage unit shift processing is performed to clear the storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) corresponding to the fourth suspension in (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 is digested in the order in which the reservations are retained.

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts “1” from the special figure 2 reservation number counter (S1606), and decreases the special figure 2 reservation number indicated by the special figure 2 reservation display 83b by “1” and changes the number (S1607). ), Change the special operation status to “2” (S1615), and proceed to step S1616.

  In the basic embodiment as described above, the special symbol change display based on the special figure 1 reservation is performed only when the special figure 2 reservation is “0” (YES in S1601). In other words, the special figure 2 suspension is executed prior to the special figure 1 suspension. And in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 reservation is easier to win the jackpot symbol having a large profit for the player than the lottery based on the special figure 1 reservation. Note that the special figure 1 suspension may be executed prior to the special figure 2 suspension. In addition, the digestion of the reservation of the special figure 1 and the digestion of the reservation of the special figure 2 may be performed in the order in which the reservation occurs regardless of the type of the special figure.

[Special design change processing]
Next, the special symbol changing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to terminate the variation display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special symbol variation time). It is determined whether or not the operation counter is 0) (S1701). If the special symbol change display is not to be ended (NO in S1701), the special symbol change process is ended, and the special symbol change display is to be ended (YES in S1701). Is terminated, and a special symbol corresponding to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or loss special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 is stopped and displayed (S1702).

  Subsequently, a special figure determination time (for example, 0.8 seconds) set in advance is set in a special operation timer (S1703), and a special figure fluctuation stop command indicating that the fluctuation display of the special symbol ends is output to the output buffer. Is set to (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol variation process is ended.

[Special design confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to terminate the special symbol stop display, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (the special symbol determination time has elapsed). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1751). If the special symbol stop display is not to be ended (NO in S1751), the special symbol determination process is ended, and the special symbol stop display is to be ended (YES in S1751), and the normal probability state is present (the high probability flag is OFF). It is determined whether or not (S1752).

  If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1775, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), it is in the time reduction state (the time reduction flag is ON). It is determined whether or not this is the case (S1753). If not in the time reduction state (NO in S1753), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1775, and if the current time reduction state is present (YES in S1753), the remaining special symbols that can be executed in the time reduction state are variably displayed. The value of the number-of-time-remaining-time counter for counting the number of times (the number of remaining time-saving times) is decremented by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether the value of the number-of-time-remaining-times counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time reduction remaining number counter (remaining number of time savings) is not “0” (NO in S1755), the process proceeds to step S1775, and if the value (remaining number of time savings) is “0” (in step S1755). (YES), shift from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (turn off the time saving flag) (S1756), and proceed to step S1775.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 101 checks the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1775), and determines whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a big hit symbol. Is determined (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), the special operation status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special symbol determination process is completed, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), the gaming state is reset (S1758). The normal game state is set, specifically, the high probability flag and the time reduction flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time reduction remaining number counter are set to “0” (S1759).

  Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to “4” (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. The game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the jackpot game preparation process. In addition, a jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening is being performed according to the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed is turned on in a predetermined area of the gaming RAM 104, and a predetermined opening time (the jackpot game is started) according to the type of the jackpot symbol. (The time from the start to the start of one round) is set in the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating the type of the big hit symbol is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 according to the type of the big hit symbol. The opening command according to the type of the big hit symbol indicates that the big hit game (opening of the big hit game) according to the type of the big hit symbol stopped and displayed is started.

6). Effect control by effect control board 120 [effect control main processing]
Next, the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. Note that the flowchart for controlling the effects described below is an example. As for a plurality of processes in the flowchart, the execution order can be appropriately changed or the processes can be executed in parallel as long as the process contents do not cause inconsistency.

  In addition, counters, timers, flags, buffers, and the like appearing in the description of the effect control by the effect control board 120 are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the effect control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the effect ROM 123 and executes it.

  As shown in the figure, in the effect control main processing, first, a power-on processing corresponding to the power-on is performed (S4001). In the power-on processing, for example, settings for the effect CPU 122, settings for SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), and the like are performed.

  Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number seed update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number seed updating process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations regarding various effects are updated. The random numbers for effect determination include various random numbers for determining the effect contents such as a random number for stop symbol pattern determination and a random number for special figure variation effect pattern determination described later.

  As an example, the method of updating the determination random number counter for various effects may be the same as the method of updating the random number performed by the game control board 100 described above. At the time of updating, instead of adding the random numbers one by one, two may be added. This is the same in the random number update processing performed by the game control board 100 described above.

  Upon completion of the random number seed update process, a command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 (for example, a special figure variation effect start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start) Command and an ending effect start command) are transmitted to the image control board 140.

  The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a according to the received command (executes various effects using the image). In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 140, the effect control board 120 outputs sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executes various effects by sound), and a sub-drive board. The frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the 162 (to execute various effects by light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (to execute various effects by operation). Note that the various effects include special figure fluctuation effects, jackpot game effects (jackpot opening effects, round effects, jackpot ending effects), customer waiting effects, operation effects, look-ahead effects, and the like.

  The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently permits the interruption (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While the interruption is permitted, the reception interruption processing (S4010), the 1 ms timer interruption processing (S4011), and the 10 ms timer interruption processing (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) and the 10ms timer interrupt processing (S4012) will be described later.

  The reception interrupt processing (S4010) is executed each time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100, is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interruption process (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received in the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124. This reception interruption process is executed prior to other interruption processes (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to FIG. The 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a period of 1 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs an input process (S4101). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates the second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

  Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data output process (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing suitable for the effect by the image or the like, so that the light emission data created in the emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Is output to the sub-drive board 162. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

  Next, effect control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the panel movable body 55k) to drive the panel movable body 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

  Then, effect controlling microcomputer 121 performs watchdog timer processing for resetting the watchdog timer (S4104), and ends the 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, a 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse having a period of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs a reception command analysis process for analyzing a command stored in the reception buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The reception command analysis processing will be described in detail in a first embodiment described later.

  Next, effect control microcomputer 121 performs a sound control process (S4202). In the sound control processing, based on the effect contents indicated by the special figure fluctuation effect data set in the effect RAM 124, the sound data (data for controlling the output of the sound from the speaker 52) is generated and transmitted to the sound control circuit 161. Is output.

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation processing, light emission data is created based on the effect contents indicated by the special figure fluctuation effect data set in the effect RAM 124 and the like.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIGS. In the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first receives a start winning command (a first start winning command or a second start winning command) from the game control board 100, in other words, receives a start winning command. It is determined whether the data is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4302, whereas if it has not received the start winning command (NO in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4303.

  In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a start winning prize process corresponding to a game ball winning in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12. In the start prize winning process, the received start prize command is stored in the start prize command holding storage unit 125 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect indicating a jackpot expectation degree. The pre-reading effect includes, in addition to the holding icon notice for displaying the holding icon in a special mode, a continuous notice effect performed over a plurality of successively changing displays of the special symbol. When it is determined that these prefetch effects are to be executed, a prefetch effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

  When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 transmits a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and a prefetch effect with the image is performed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50. Further, during the pre-reading effect by the image performed by the image control board 140, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control in accordance with the pre-reading effect content indicated by the pre-reading effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. A sound is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (a pre-reading effect by voice is executed), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (a pre-fetching effect by light emission is executed). It is possible to activate 55k (execute a prefetch effect by operation).

  In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the design specification command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the design specification command has been stored in the reception buffer. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4305 if the symbol designating command has not been received (NO in S4303), while if the symbol designating command has been received (YES in S4303), the effect designating microcomputer 121 transmits the symbol designating command to the effect RAM 124. (S4304).

  In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether a special figure change start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure change start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure change start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4307. If the special figure change start command has been received (YES in S4305), the effect contents of the special figure change effect are determined. Then, a special figure fluctuation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure fluctuation effect is performed.

  In the special figure variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first stores the special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage unit 127 in the effect RAM 124. Next, an effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed based on the contents of the stop special figure (type of big hit symbol, loss special figure) indicated by the design specification command already stored in step S4304 and the special figure change pattern indicated by the special figure change start command. To EZ3 and a stop symbol pattern determination table for performing a stop symbol determination for determining the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the special figure and the special figure variation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure variation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, the random number for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination) is assigned to a plurality of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Values) are sorted. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs a stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

  The effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random numbers with the selected stop symbol pattern table in the stop symbol pattern determination, and determines the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, the data representing the determined effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the special figure variation pattern is the loss variation with no reach, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to form a so-called “ragged eye”. Further, if the special figure variation pattern is the loss variation with reach, the left effect design EZ1 and the right effect design EZ3 are the same, and the effect design EZ1 to EZ3 and the small design KZ1 so that the middle effect design EZ2 is different from them. The combination of KZ3 is selected. Furthermore, if the special figure fluctuation pattern is the big hit fluctuation, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to form a so-called “double-eye” according to the effect mode and the type of the big hit symbol. .

  Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 generates a special figure variation effect pattern in which the effect contents of the special figure variation effect are associated based on the effect mode in which the user is staying and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. A special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination table for performing the special figure fluctuation effect pattern determination is selected. A plurality of special figure variation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure variation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure variation effect pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each of the special figure variation effect pattern determination tables, one or more special figure variation effect patterns are provided with values of random numbers for the special figure variation effect pattern determination (the special figure variation effect pattern) so that a predetermined distribution rate (%) is obtained. (Judgment value) is distributed. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 obtains the value indicated by the special figure variation effect pattern determination random number counter as the special figure variation effect pattern determination random number, and executes the special figure variation effect pattern determination random number based on the acquired special figure variation effect pattern determination random number. A fluctuation effect pattern is determined.

  In the special figure variation effect pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 compares the acquired special figure variation effect pattern determination random number with the selected special figure variation effect pattern determination table, determines the special figure variation effect pattern, and determines The data representing the special figure variation effect pattern is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and a special figure variation effect start command indicating the special figure variation effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

  When the special figure fluctuation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 Is read out, and a special-figure variation effect using images is performed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50.

  The special figure fluctuation effect start command includes, in addition to the special figure fluctuation effect by an image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure fluctuation effect by sound output from the speaker 52, and the special figure fluctuation by light emission performed by the frame lamp 53. The effect contents of the figure fluctuation effect and the effect contents of the special figure fluctuation effect by the operation performed by the board movable body 55k are included.

  The effect control microcomputer 121 performs the special figure fluctuation effect content indicated by the special figure fluctuation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the special figure fluctuation effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is performed. In response to the above, a sound is output from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (executing a special figure variation effect by sound), and the frame lamp 53 is caused to emit light via the sub-drive board 162 (special figure by light emission). A fluctuation effect is executed), and the board movable body 55k is operated (a special figure fluctuation effect by operation is executed).

  In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether a special figure change stop command is received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the special figure change stop command is stored in the reception buffer. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4309 if the special figure change stop command has not been received (NO in S4307), or if the special figure change stop command has been received (YES in S4307). A special figure fluctuation effect ending process (S4308) for terminating the effect (stopping the fluctuation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and performing a stop display) is performed.

  In the special figure variation effect ending process, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure variation stop command, and appropriately terminates the special figure variation effect based on the analysis result (the effect designs EZ1 to EZ3 and the small design KZ1). ＫKZ3 is stopped in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When receiving the special figure fluctuation effect end command, the image control board 140 terminates the running special figure fluctuation effect (stops the fluctuation effect patterns EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3).

  In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the game state command (NO in S4309), the process proceeds to step S4311, whereas if it has received the game state command (YES in S4309), it analyzes the game state command. Then, a game state indicated by the game state command is specified, and a game state setting process for setting the game state is performed (S4310).

  The effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 in the game state setting process. For example, if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. If the game state indicated by the game state command is a high-probability-high base game state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. Furthermore, if the gaming state indicated by the gaming state command is a low-probability, high-base gaming state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the gaming state flag “02H” in the gaming state flag area of the rendering RAM 124.

  In step S4311, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if it has received the customer waiting command (YES in S4311), performs the customer waiting effect standby process. (S4312), the received command analysis processing ends.

  In the customer waiting effect wait process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time: for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect symbol to the start of the customer waiting effect. Set the timer. The effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not the standby time has elapsed. If the standby time has elapsed, the effect control microcomputer 121 sends a customer wait effect start command for starting the customer wait effect to the effect RAM 124. To the output buffer of

  In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the opening control command has not been received (NO in S4313), the processing control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S4315, while if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the jackpot accompanying the start of the jackpot game starts. An opening effect start process is performed (S4314).

  In the jackpot opening effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command and determines whether to execute the jackpot opening effect according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed based on the analysis result. Then, if it is to be executed, the effect content (jackpot opening effect pattern) of the jackpot opening effect is selected, and a jackpot opening effect start command for starting the jackpot opening effect with the selected jackpot opening effect pattern is output from the effect RAM 124. Set in buffer.

  In step S4315, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the round number designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the number-of-rounds designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317. If the number-of-rounds designation command has been received (YES in S4315), a round effect start process accompanying the start of the round game is performed. (S4316).

  In the round effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the number-of-rounds designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect according to the round game to be started from now on. Is selected, and a round effect start command corresponding to the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

  In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the process proceeds to step S4320. On the other hand, if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending effect start process accompanying the start of the jackpot game ending (S4318). , And effect mode setting processing (S4319).

  In the jackpot ending effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed from now, if it is to be executed. The effect content (big hit ending effect pattern) of the big hit ending effect is selected, and a big hit ending effect start command corresponding to the selected big hit ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

  In the effect mode setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the big hit game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the big hit symbol indicated by the ending command (the effect mode is set). Control).

  For example, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the probability change effect mode indicating the high probability and high base gaming state. Then, an effect mode flag indicating the certainty effect mode is turned on in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and a certainty effect mode start command indicating setting of the certainty effect mode is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the probable variable effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 determines when the ending ends. , The probabilistic change background image G120 is displayed as the background image, and the probabilistic change BGM is output as the BGM.

  In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol C, the jackpot symbol E, or the jackpot symbol F. A time-saving effect mode is set in which it is difficult or impossible to determine which of the gaming states. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the effect mode flag indicating the time reduction effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and outputs a time reduction effect mode start command indicating setting of the time reduction effect mode to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Set to. When the time-saving effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 determines when the ending ends. The background image G130 for time reduction is displayed as a background image, and the BGM for time reduction is output as BGM.

  In step S4320, effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a set value designation command has been received from game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the set value designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the set value designation command (NO in S4320), it ends the received command analysis process, while if it has received the set value designation command (YES in S4320), A setting value setting process for storing a setting value flag indicating a setting value indicated by the command in the setting value flag storage unit 128 in the effect RAM 124 is performed (S4321), and the received command analysis process ends.

<First Embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a set value effect related to a set value based on the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6. In the first embodiment, mainly points different from the basic embodiment will be described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configuration as the basic embodiment or the configuration corresponding to the same in the same manner.

  As described in the basic embodiment, a sensor for detecting a winning game ball at the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, such as the first starting port sensor 11a or the second starting port sensor 12a, is provided. ing. In the first embodiment, in addition to the sensors for detecting a winning game ball like these sensors, as shown in FIG. 48, the game balls discharged to the outside of the game region 6 after entering the game region 6 as shown in FIG. An out sensor 19a for detecting is provided.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the special winning opening 14, and a game ball that has entered the out opening 19, The spheres are collected in one possible flow path (not shown). An out sensor 19a for detecting a game ball is provided on this route. In the following, a game ball discharged out of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6 is referred to as an “out ball”.

  Along with the provision of the out sensor 19a, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred in the sensor detection process of step S104. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, after step S224 of the sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S225 whether an out ball has occurred, in other words, whether the out sensor 19a has detected a game ball. Determine whether or not. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that an out ball has not occurred (NO in S225), it ends the sensor detection process as it is, and if it determines that an out ball has occurred, in step S226, it determines that an out ball has occurred. The indicated out designation command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the sensor detection processing ends. The game balls set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 are transmitted to the effect control board 120 by the output processing in step S107.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 counts the number of generated out-balls based on the received out-ball command. Then, when the jackpot is won after the number of out balls reaches 50,000, the effect control microcomputer 121 may execute a set value effect indicating a set value in the jackpot opening effect relating to the jackpot. For example, in the setting value effect, as shown in FIG. 50, the number of fireworks images G20 according to the setting value is displayed. That is, the number of displayed firework images G20 indicates the set value.

  If the set value “1” is set, one firework image G20 is displayed in addition to the jackpot opening effect in which the set value effect is not performed (see FIG. 50A). Similarly, if the set values “2” to “6” are set, two to six fireworks images G20 are displayed in addition to the jackpot opening effect in which the set value effect is not performed (FIG. 50). (B) to FIG. 50 (F)).

  The processing for performing the set value effect of the first embodiment can be set as appropriate. For example, an out-ball counter for counting out-balls is provided in the effect RAM 124. Then, after step S4321 of the received command analysis processing, effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not an out-ball command has been received. If it is determined that an out-ball command has been received, the out-ball counter is incremented by "1". Is performed. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the counter value of the out-ball counter is 50,000, that is, whether or not 50,000 out-balls have occurred. When it is determined that there is a setting value effect, a process of setting a set value effect flag for performing a set value effect in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 is performed.

  Then, in the opening effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the presence or absence of the set value effect flag, and if the set value effect flag is set, performs the set value effect according to the set value indicated by the set value flag. In order to cause the image control board 140 to execute, a set value effect start command corresponding to the set value is set in an output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set value effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission processing in step S4004. Then, the image control board 140 appropriately displays the number of fireworks images G20 corresponding to the set values in the jackpot opening effect based on the received set value effect start command.

  As described above, since the set value effect is executed based on the number of out balls, the game balls that have been fired but have entered the out port 19 are not wasted, so that the player's willingness to play In addition to improving the operating rate by preventing the decline of the game, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game. Further, since the jackpot winning is also included in the condition for executing the set value effect, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for the jackpot winning.

(Modification of First Embodiment)
Note that the number of out balls constituting the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to 50,000, and may be appropriately set. Further, the number of out-balls for executing the set value effect (hereinafter, referred to as “out-ball determination value”) is not limited to one, and a plurality of out-balls may be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 51, an out-ball determination value may be associated with a set value. As shown in FIG. 51, the out-ball judgment value may be increased as the set value is increased. By doing in this way, for example, the jackpot game was performed when the number of out balls is less than 34000, but when the set value effect is not executed, at least the set value “1” that is most disadvantageous to the player Is determined, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

  Further, the number of out-ball judgment values constituting the execution condition of the set value effect is set to 40,000 and 60,000. Then, when the number of out balls reaches 40,000 and a jackpot is won, the set value indicates any one of 1 to 3 or any of 4 to 6, in other words, a value indicating a relatively low or high value. 1 Perform a set value effect. In this case, there are two types of production modes of the first set value production, and if it is one production mode, the setting value is a relatively low value of 1 to 3, and if it is the other production mode, the setting value is It is a relatively high value of 4-6. Next, when the out ball determination value reaches 60,000 and the jackpot is won, a second set value effect indicating that the set value is one of 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 is performed. In this case, there are three types of production mode of the second set value production, and if it is a certain production mode, the setting value is either 1 or 4, and if it is another production mode, the setting value is 2 or 5 And the set value may be any one of 3 and 6 for the remaining effect modes. As described above, the setting value may be suggested stepwise by executing the setting value effect.

  Furthermore, although the set value effect is executed in the jackpot opening effect, the effect time of the set value effect is not limited to the jackpot opening effect, but may be a round effect or a jackpot ending effect. Further, the set value effect can be executed in the jackpot opening effect of any jackpot game, for example, only in a specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively large number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base game state , The setting value effect may be executed. Conversely, the configuration may be such that the set value effect can be executed only in a specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game having a relatively small number of rounds or a jackpot game with a low-probability high base game state.

  Also, two types of out ball judgment values, which are threshold values for executing the set value effect, may be provided, and the type of the big hit as a condition for executing the set value effect may be changed depending on the out ball judgment value. After the number of out balls reaches 30,000, set based on winning a specific jackpot related to a specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively large number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base game state Enable the value effect. On the other hand, after the number of out balls reaches 60,000, it has won a non-specific jackpot related to a non-specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively small number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base game state Based on the setting value effect is made executable. In addition, the magnitude of the number of out spheres, which is a threshold value for executing the set value effect, and the type of the big hit for executing the set value effect may be switched.

  Furthermore, the set value effect is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot is won after the number of out balls reaches the out ball judgment value, but the set value effect is executed in the special figure fluctuation effect related to the jackpot winning. Is also good. In this case, the execution time of the set value effect is not limited, but at a specific time such as at the start of the special figure fluctuation effect, at the time of reaching, at the time of developing to the SP reach effect, or at the time of stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. May be set.

  Also, regardless of the jackpot determination result, the set value effect is a specific effect such as SP reach or a specific SP reach that indicates that the jackpot expectation degree is high after the number of out balls reaches the out ball judgment value. May be executed by executing. In this case, for example, after the number of out-balls reaches the out-ball determination value, if a specific SP reach having a relatively high jackpot expectation is executed in SP reach, the set value is set in the specific SP reach. An effect may be performed.

  Further, the set value effect indicates the set value by the number of firework images G20, but the effect mode indicating the set value is not limited to the number of firework images G20, and may be appropriately set. For example, the set value effect may indicate the set value in another effect mode such as the size or color of the firework image G20. Further, the set value effect may be executed using another effect device such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the panel movable device 55 instead of or in addition to the image display device 50. .

  Further, in the set value effect, six types of effect modes are set, and each effect mode is associated with the set value on a one-to-one basis. However, a plurality of set values are associated with one effect mode. May be. For example, there are three types of presentation modes, the first presentation mode is associated with the setting value “1” and the setting value “2”, and the second presentation mode is associated with the setting value “3” and the setting value “ 4 ", and the third effect mode may be associated with the set value" 5 "and the set value" 6 ". In addition, a set value “1” and a set value “6” are associated with the first effect mode, a set value “2” and a set value “5” are associated with the second effect mode, The setting value “3” and the setting value “4” may be associated with the third effect mode.

  Alternatively, there are six types of production modes, and all the setting values are associated with each production mode. However, the possibility of the set values set in each production mode may be different. For example, the first to sixth effect modes are set as the effect mode of the set value effect, and the set value “1”> the set value “2”> the set value “3”> the set value “4”> the setting In the order of value “5”> setting value “6”, there is a high possibility that the setting value effect of the first effect mode is executed, and setting value “6”> setting value “5”> setting value “4”> setting The configuration may be such that the possibility that the set value effect of the sixth effect mode is executed in the order of the value “3”> the set value “2”> the set value “1” is high.

  Further, the set value effect may not be executed independently of the jackpot opening effect or the SP reach effect, but may be executed in a form incorporated in the jackpot opening effect or the SP reach effect. For example, a setting value effect that suggests a setting value may be executed based on the color, size, display position, or the like of the opening image G1 or the right-hit image G2, or the type of a character that appears.

  In addition, a sensor is provided for detecting only the game balls that have entered the out port 19 without detecting the game balls that have won the first starting port 11 or the like, and based on the number of game balls that have entered the out port 19. Alternatively, the set value effect may be executed in the same manner as the above-described set value effect.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. Also in the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 executes a set value effect related to a set value based on a game ball discharged out of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6. In the second embodiment, differences from the first embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configuration as the basic embodiment or the configuration corresponding to the same in the same manner.

  In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an out sensor 19a is provided. In the sensor detection processing, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred, and if it determines that an out ball has occurred, sets the out designation command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

  Further, in the general winning opening prize ball processing (S202) of the sensor detection processing, the game control microcomputer 101 sends a general winning opening winning command indicating that a game ball has won the general winning opening 10 to an output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. set. In addition, in the special winning opening prize ball processing (S224) of the sensor detection processing, the game control microcomputer 101 sends a special winning opening winning command indicating that a game ball has won to the special winning opening 14 to an output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. set.

  Here, the game ball that has entered the game area 6 enters one of the general winning port 10, the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the large winning port 14, or the out port 19, and enters the gaming area 6. , The number of out balls can be said to be the number of game balls successfully fired and entering the game area 6. Therefore, the number of out balls can be positioned as the number of fired game balls. Hereinafter, the number of game balls that are normally fired is also referred to as the “number of fired balls”.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 counts the difference number that is the difference between the number of shot balls and the acquired number of prize balls. The acquired number of prize balls refers to the number of prize balls acquired by entering the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the special winning opening 14. The number of prize balls by winning can be appropriately set, but in the above example, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 10, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. Similarly, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the special winning opening 14, 14 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Then, it is assumed that the number of shot balls is represented by a negative value and the number of winning balls is represented by a positive value. Then, for example, 12,000 game balls are fired, three balls enter the general winning opening 10, 150 balls enter the first starting opening 11, 5 balls enter the second starting opening 12, and a large winning opening. Assume that 45 balls have entered 14. In this case, the difference number is (3 × 3) + (4 × 150) + (4 × 5) + (14 × 45) −12000 = −10741.

  Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the set value effect when the number of differences reaches −20,000. Unlike the first embodiment, the set value effect can be executed in any of a special figure fluctuation effect, a jackpot game effect, or a demonstration effect. In the setting value effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, a small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at a height corresponding to the setting value. That is, the height at which the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed indicates the set value. Note that, in detail, as the set value increases, the position where the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed increases.

  For example, if the difference number reaches −20000 during the special figure fluctuation effect, if the set value “1” is set, the small unmanned aerial vehicle image is set at the lowest height among the set values. G21 appears at the right end of the display unit 50a, moves leftward, and disappears from the left end so as to cross the display unit 50a from right to left. (See FIG. 52A). Similarly, if the set value “6” is set, the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at the highest height among the set values (see FIG. 52 (F)). If the set value “2” to the set value “5” are set, the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at a height corresponding to the set value (see FIGS. 52B to 52E). ).

  The processing for performing the set value effect of the second embodiment can be appropriately set. For example, the effect RAM 124 is provided with a difference counter for counting the number of differences. The effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the out ball command is received in the received command analysis process, and when it is determined that the out ball command is received, performs a process of subtracting “1” from the difference number counter. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the general winning opening winning command has been received in the received command analysis process, and if it is determined that the command has been received, performs a process of adding “3” to the difference counter. Do. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning command has been received in the received command analyzing process, and if it is determined that the special winning opening winning command has been received, performs a process of adding “14” to the difference number counter. Do. In addition, when it is determined in step S4301 of the received command analysis process that the start winning command has been received, the effect control microcomputer 121 adds “4” to the difference counter, for example, after the start winning process. Perform processing.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the set value effect determination process after step S4203 of, for example, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012). In the set value effect determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the counter value of the difference number counter is -20,000, that is, whether or not the difference number has reached -20,000. . Subsequently, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the counter value of the difference number counter is −20,000, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the image control board 140 to execute a set value effect corresponding to the set value indicated by the set value flag. A set value effect start command corresponding to the set value is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set value effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission processing in step S4004. Then, based on the received set value effect start command, the image control board 140 appropriately displays the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 at a height corresponding to the set value.

  As described above, since the set value effect is executed based on the number of differences reflecting the out ball, the game ball that has been fired but has entered the out port 19 is not wasted. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's willingness to play, to improve the operating rate, and to improve the game entertainment.

(Modification of Second Embodiment)
Note that the number of differences constituting the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to −20,000 and may be set as appropriate. For example, the number of differences for executing the set value effect (hereinafter, referred to as “difference number determination value”) is not limited to one, and a plurality may be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the difference value determination value may be associated with the set value. As shown in FIG. 53, the difference number determination value may be made lower as the set value becomes higher. By doing so, for example, when the difference number reaches -12000, but the set value effect is not executed, it is determined at least that the set value is not the most disadvantageous set value “1” for the player. Can give a sense of security. Increasing the number of differences is a difficult situation for the player, but the longer the situation is, the higher the set value is. Therefore, a decrease in the player's willingness to play can be suppressed.

  Also, the difference number determination values are set to -15000 and -30000. Then, when the number of differences reaches -15000, the first set value effect indicating that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 or any of 4 to 6, in other words, a relatively low value or a high value. Do. In this case, there are two types of production modes of the first set value production, and if it is one production mode, the setting value is a relatively low value of 1 to 3, and if it is the other production mode, the setting value is It is a relatively high value of 4-6. Next, when the number of differences reaches -30000, a second set value effect indicating that the set value is one of 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 is performed. In this case, there are three types of production mode of the second set value production, and if it is a certain production mode, the setting value is either 1 or 4, and if it is another production mode, the setting value is 2 or 5 And the set value may be any one of 3 and 6 for the remaining effect modes. As described above, the setting value may be suggested stepwise by executing the setting value effect.

  Furthermore, the set value effect suggests the set value by the display position of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21, but the effect mode suggesting the set value is not limited to the display position of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21, and may be appropriately set Is also good. For example, the set value effect may indicate the set value according to another effect mode such as the size, color, moving speed, or number of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21. Further, the set value effect may be executed using another effect device such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the panel movable device 55 instead of or in addition to the image display device 50. .

  In addition, six types of effect modes are set in the set value effect, and each effect mode is associated with the set value on a one-to-one basis, but a plurality of set values are associated with one effect mode. May be. For example, there are three types of presentation modes, the first presentation mode is associated with the setting value “1” and the setting value “2”, and the second presentation mode is associated with the setting value “3” and the setting value “ 4 ", and the third effect mode may be associated with the set value" 5 "and the set value" 6 ". Further, a set value “1” and a set value “6” are associated with the first effect mode, and a set value “2” and a set value “5” are associated with the second effect mode. The set value “3” and the set value “4” may be associated with the third effect mode.

  Alternatively, there are six types of production modes, and all the setting values are associated with each production mode. However, the possibility of the set values set in each production mode may be different. For example, the first to sixth effect modes are set as the effect mode of the set value effect, and the set value “1”> the set value “2”> the set value “3”> the set value “4”> the setting In the order of value “5”> setting value “6”, there is a high possibility that the setting value effect of the first effect mode is executed, and setting value “6”> setting value “5”> setting value “4”> setting The configuration may be such that the possibility that the set value effect of the sixth effect mode is executed in the order of the value “3”> the set value “2”> the set value “1” is high.

  The difference number as the execution condition of the set value effect reflects the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the special winning opening 14. May be limited to some types of prize balls to be reflected in the prize ball. For example, only the prize ball acquired by entering the special winning opening 14 may be reflected in the difference number which is the execution condition of the set value effect. Alternatively, only the prize balls acquired by entering the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, and the second starting opening 12 may be reflected in the difference number as the execution condition of the set value effect.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the third embodiment can execute variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 with images different from those of the basic embodiment described above. Then, a set value effect indicating a set value is executed using the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. In the third embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configuration as the basic embodiment or the configuration corresponding to the same in the same manner.

  First, the effect symbols that constitute the set value effect will be described. 54A to 54C, there are a first composite symbol G221, a second composite symbol G222, and a third composite symbol G223, as shown in FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (C). The first composite symbol G221 is used for variably displaying the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the first normal effect stage. Similarly, the second composite symbol G222 is used for variably displaying the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the second normal effect stage. The third composite symbol G223 is used for variably displaying the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the third normal effect stage. Hereinafter, the first composite symbol G221, the second composite symbol G222, and the third composite symbol G223 are collectively referred to as a "compound symbol G22".

  The first composite symbol G221 has a first lottery result suggestion unit G221a for suggesting a special figure lottery result, and a first set value suggestion unit G221b for suggesting a set value. Similarly, the second composite symbol G222 has a second lottery result suggestion unit G222a for suggesting a special figure lottery result, and a second set value suggestion unit G222b for suggesting a set value. In addition, the third composite symbol G223 has a third lottery result suggestion unit G223a for suggesting a special figure lottery result, and a third set value suggestion unit G223b for suggesting a set value.

  In the following, the first lottery result suggesting section G221a, the second lottery result suggesting section G222a, and the third lottery result suggesting section G223a are collectively referred to as a "lottery result suggesting section G22a". Further, the first set value suggesting section G221b, the second set value suggesting section G222b, and the third set value suggesting section G223b are collectively referred to as a "setting value suggesting section G22b".

  The lottery result suggestion unit G22a is similar in role to the rendering symbol G10 used for the variable display of the rendering symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the basic embodiment and the first and second embodiments. Therefore, it can be said that the composite symbol G22 is configured by adding the set value suggestion unit G22b to the effect symbol G10 in the basic embodiment and the first and second embodiments.

  The first lottery result suggestion unit G221a is configured by an image in which the numbers “1” to “9” overlap the baseball ball, as in the basic embodiment. Similarly, the second lottery result suggestion unit G222a is configured by an image in which numbers “1” to “9” overlap with baseball gloves. In addition, the third lottery result suggestion unit G223a is configured by an image in which numbers “1” to “9” are superimposed on a baseball cap.

  The numeral portion of the first lottery result suggestion portion G221a to the third lottery result suggestion portion G223a shown in FIGS. 54A to 54C is “1”, which is “1”. The first lottery result suggestion section G221a to the third lottery result suggestion section G223a in a certain case are illustrated, and like the basic embodiment, the number portion is composed of “2” to “9”. A first lottery result suggestion section G221a to a third lottery result suggestion section G223a are also provided. Further, as in the case of the basic embodiment and the like, the numbers of “3” and “7” in the first lottery result suggestion unit G221a to the third lottery result suggestion unit G223a are configured in red, and the first lottery is performed. Other numbers in the result suggestion part G221a to the third lottery result suggestion part G223a are configured in blue.

  The first setting value suggesting unit G221b, the second setting value suggesting unit G222b, and the third setting value suggesting unit G223b are configured by the same image representing a shutter that can be opened and closed in the vertical direction. FIGS. 54A to 54C show the first composite symbol G221 to the third composite symbol G223 in a state where the shutters of the first set value suggesting unit G221b to the third set value suggesting unit G223b are closed. I have. Here, taking the first composite symbol G221 as an example, when the shutter of the first setting value suggestion unit G221b is opened, the first setting value suggestion unit G221b will display any one of FIGS. 54 (D) to 54 (F). State. Specifically, when the shutter of the first setting value suggestion unit G221b is opened, “○” is displayed on the first setting value suggestion unit G221b (FIG. 54 (D)), and “△” is displayed. (FIG. 54 (E)) and a case where “×” is displayed (FIG. 54 (F)).

  Note that, similarly to the first setting value suggestion section G221b, “○”, “Δ”, and “X” are also displayed on the second setting value suggestion section G222b and the third setting value suggestion section G223b. Hereinafter, “○” displayed on the set value suggesting portion G22b is referred to as “first set value symbol G23a”, and “△” displayed on the set value suggestive portion G22b is referred to as “second set value symbol”. G23b ", and the symbol" x "displayed in the set value suggestion section G22b is referred to as a" third set value symbol G23c ". Further, the first to third set value symbols G23a to G23c are collectively referred to as “set value symbols G23”.

  Further, since the numbers displayed in the lottery result suggestion section G22a constitute identification information for suggesting the special figure lottery result, the numbers displayed in the lottery result suggestion section G22a are referred to as “lottery result information”. That. Further, “○”, “△”, and “×” displayed on the set value suggesting section G22b constitute information for suggesting a set value, and thus “「 ”displayed on the set value suggesting section G22b. , “△”, and “×” are referred to as “setting value information”.

  The shutter of the setting value suggestion unit G22b is opened when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22. Then, when the shutter of the set value suggesting section G22b is opened, the set value is suggested by a combination of the set value symbols G23 displayed in the respective set value suggesting sections G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. That is, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the set value effect G23 is displayed on each of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 to constitute the set value effect.

  In addition, regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22, any of the first set value symbol G23a to the third set value symbol G23c can be displayed on the set value suggesting portion G22b. Therefore, there are 27 types of combinations of the set value symbols G23 as the effect contents of the set value effect. Hereinafter, the combination of the set value design G23 is also referred to as a “set value design pattern”.

  In the third embodiment, the set value effect is executed in the same manner regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22, that is, regardless of the type of the effect stage, each time the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed. You. That is, the set value effect is executed according to the special figure fluctuation effect. The set value symbol pattern is selected each time the special figure fluctuation effect is executed. Which set value symbol pattern is selected is determined based on the set value set. The selectivity for each set value symbol pattern differs depending on the set value. Since the selectivity for the set value design pattern differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the set value design pattern of the set value effect to be executed.

  FIG. 55 shows the selectivity for each set value symbol pattern for each set value. Here, the column of “combination of set value symbols” in FIG. 55 represents a combination of three set value symbols G23, and the left end is the set value symbol G23 displayed on the set value suggestion portion G22b of the left effect symbol EZ1. The center represents the set value symbol G23 displayed on the set value suggestion portion G22b of the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right end represents the set value symbol G23 displayed on the set value suggestion portion G22b of the right effect symbol EZ3. .

  The selectivity of the set value symbol pattern is appropriately set. For example, when the combination of the set value symbols G23 is “「, ・, ○ ”, the set value“ 6 ”= the set value“ 5 ”> the set value There is a high probability that the set value symbol pattern 1 corresponding to the combination is selected in the order of “4” = set value “3”> set value “2” = set value “1”. That is, there is a high possibility that the set values are set in this order. Similarly, when the combination of the set value symbols G23 is “××××”, the set value “1” = set value “2”> set value “3” = set value “4”> set value “5”. = There is a high probability that the set value symbol pattern 27 corresponding to the combination is selected in the order of the set value "6". That is, there is a high possibility that the set values are set in this order. Further, when the combination of the set value symbols G23 is “△ · △ · △”, the set value “3” = the set value “4”> the set value “1” = the set value “2” = the set value “5” = There is a high probability that the set value symbol pattern 14 corresponding to the combination is selected in the order of the set value “6”. That is, there is a high possibility that the set values are set in this order.

  Here, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. Here, a specific example in which the set value effect is executed in the special figure variation effect of the loss without reach in the first normal effect stage will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a fluctuating manner, and as shown in FIG. 56 (B), after the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed. When the fluctuation of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is stopped and the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the set value effect is executed.

  Specifically, when the stop display of the effect illustration effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, as shown in FIGS. 56 (C) to 56 (E), the shutter closed by the set value suggestion unit G22b before that time. Is opened, and the set value design G23 is displayed in the set value suggestion section G22b related to the effect designs EZ1 to EZ3.

  In FIG. 56, as the set value effect, the same set value design G23 is displayed in the set value suggestion portion G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but the set value suggestion portion G22b related to the effect designs EZ1 to EZ3. In some cases, different types of set value symbols G23 may be displayed. In addition, the same type of set value symbol G23 may be displayed in two of the set value suggestion portions G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the different type of set value symbol G23 may be displayed in the other one. .

  Also, in FIG. 56, the set value effect is executed in the special figure fluctuation effect of the losing without reach, and the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is similarly performed in the losing with the reach and the special figure fluctuation effect of the big hit. At this time, a set value effect based on the set value set is executed. Further, in FIG. 56, the set value effect is executed in the first normal effect stage. However, similarly, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in the second normal effect stage and the third normal effect stage as well. A set value effect is executed based on the set value set. However, in the second normal effect stage, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 using the second composite symbol G222 are variably displayed and set value effects are performed. In addition, in the case of the third normal effect stage, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variably displayed and the set value effect is performed using the third composite symbol G223.

  Next, a process in which the effect control microcomputer 121 determines the set value symbol pattern will be described with reference to FIG. The set value symbol pattern is determined in the stop symbol pattern determination process in the special figure variation effect start process described above. That is, the stop symbol pattern determination process of the third embodiment is different from the stop symbol pattern determination process of the above-described basic embodiment.

  In the stop symbol pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first displays, in step S5001, the contents of the stop special figure (big hit symbol type or loss special figure) indicated by the stored design specification command and the special figure change start command. A lottery result information determination table for performing a lottery result information determination for determining which lottery result information should be used to stop and display the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 based on the special figure variation pattern is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 58, in the lottery result information determination table, the lottery result information determination table used when the stop special figure is the big hit symbol A or the big hit symbol D, the stop special figure is the big hit symbol B, the big hit symbol C, The lottery result information determination table used when the big hit symbol E or the big hit symbol F is used, the lottery result information determination table used when the special figure change pattern is lost, and when the special figure change pattern is no match. There is a lottery result information determination table used for.

  A plurality of lottery result information determination tables are provided in association with the special figure and the special figure change pattern. Therefore, effect control microcomputer 121 selects one lottery result information determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure change pattern. In each lottery result information determination table, the numbers displayed on the lottery result suggestion part G22a for each of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that specifically represent the lottery result information are set so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. The value of the random number for lottery result information determination (lottery result information determination value) is distributed. In addition, a stop symbol pattern is associated with each lottery result information as identification information for identifying the lottery result information.

  In step S5002, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for lottery result information determination as a random number for lottery result information determination, and in step S5003, the lottery result information based on the acquired random number for lottery result information determination. Make a decision. The random number counter for lottery result information determination is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed updating process in step S4003.

  In the lottery result information determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the selected lottery result information determination table against the acquired random numbers for the lottery result information determination, and determines the lottery result information related to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. . Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the data representing the determined lottery result information in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 in step S5004. In the following, data representing the determined lottery result information is referred to as “lottery result information data”.

  Next, in step S5005, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a set value symbol pattern determination table based on the set value indicated by the set value flag set. As described above, the set value symbol pattern determination table includes a set value symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is “1”, a set value symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is “2”, and a set value. A set value symbol pattern determination table used when the value is "3", a set value symbol pattern determination table used when the value is "4", a set value symbol pattern determination table used when the value is "5", and There is a set value symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is “6”.

  A plurality of each set value symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the set values. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one set value symbol pattern determination table associated with the set value. In each set value symbol pattern determination table, the value of the random number for set value symbol pattern determination (set value symbol pattern determination value) is assigned to the set value symbol pattern so that the selectivity (%) shown in FIG. I have.

  The effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the set value symbol pattern determination random number counter as the set value symbol pattern determination random number in step S5006, and based on the acquired set value symbol pattern determination random number in step S5007. Set value symbol pattern judgment is performed. The random number counter for setting value symbol pattern determination is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed updating process in step S4003.

  In the set value symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the selected set value symbol pattern determination table against the acquired set value symbol pattern determination random numbers to determine the set value symbol pattern. Then, in step S5008, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets data representing the determined set value symbol pattern in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. In the following, data representing the determined set value symbol pattern is referred to as “set value symbol pattern data”.

  Finally, in step S5009, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets an effect symbol command indicating the lottery result information pattern and the set value symbol pattern in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and ends the stop symbol pattern determination process.

  When the effect symbol command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads a predetermined effect image from the image ROM 142. Is read out, and on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, the lottery result information pattern indicated by the effect symbol command and the set value symbol pattern are stopped and displayed for the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. The symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed.

  Although not shown, for example, when L reach or SP reach is executed, the left effect design EZ1 and the right effect design EZ3 are reduced, and the left effect design EZ1 moves to the upper left corner of the display unit 50a, The right effect symbol EZ3 moves to the upper right corner of the display unit 50a. Then, at this time, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 may include only the numeral portion of the lottery result suggestion portion G22a, and may be simplified more than before entering L reach or SP reach.

  As described above, in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 executed along with the variable display of the special figure, the set value effect indicating the set value is executed. Can be prevented from getting tired. In particular, this effect is basically effective when the no-reach losing continues repeatedly and intuitively.

  The set value effect is executed in conjunction with the variable display of the special figure, similarly to the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but is executed in the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 smaller than the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. It has not been. As described above, since the set value effects are not repeatedly executed, it is possible to prevent the effect of the set value effects from being reduced and to reduce the effect of the set value effects.

(Modification of Third Embodiment)
The set value effect in the third embodiment is executed using the composite symbol G22, but the configuration of the composite symbol G22 is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the setting value suggestion unit G22b related to the setting value effect is added to the lower end of the lottery result suggestion unit G22a. The position of the setting value suggestion unit G22b with respect to the lottery result suggestion unit G22a is appropriately set. Is also good. Specifically, the setting value suggestion unit G22b may be arranged at the upper end, the right end, or the left end of the lottery result suggestion unit G22a. Alternatively, the setting value suggesting section G22b may be arranged so as to overlap the lottery result suggesting section G22a. Further, although the set value suggesting section G22b is smaller than the lottery result suggesting section G22a, the size of the set value suggesting section G22b with respect to the lottery result suggesting section G22a is substantially the same as the lottery result suggesting section G22a or the lottery result suggesting section G22a. It may be set appropriately, such as larger than.

  Further, the set value effect is executed using the composite symbol G22. However, as in the basic embodiment, the effect symbol is generated using an image in which the set value suggesting unit G22b indicating the set value effect is not provided. EZ1 to EZ3 may be executed, and the set value effect may be executed using a symbol different from effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. In this case, the set value effect may be performed by providing an area for the set value effect on the display unit 50a or by installing an image display device other than the image display device 50.

  Furthermore, the types of the set value design G23 related to the set value effect of the third embodiment are “○”, “△”, and “×”, but some of these, or “◇” or “□”. Alternatively, the set value effect may be executed by adding another type. Alternatively, the set value effect may be executed using an image completely different from “と”, “△”, and “×”. Alternatively, the type of the set value design G23 related to the set value effect is one type, and only the frequency at which the one type of set value design G23 is aligned and displayed in all the set value suggestion parts G22b of the effect designs EZ1 to EZ3, The setting value may be suggested.

  In addition, the probability that each set value symbol G23 related to the set value effect of the third embodiment is displayed together in all the set value suggestion portions G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is the set value “1” and the set value “2”. , The set value “3” and the set value “4”, and the set value “5” and the set value “6” in the same manner, and the set values of the six stages are set to “small”, “medium” and “high”. Although the setting is made separately, this dividing method is not limited to this and may be set as appropriate. For example, the probability that each set value symbol G23 is displayed together in all the set value suggestion parts G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be set differently for each of the six set values, or may be set in six different stages. The set values may be set separately for “small” and “high” of the set values “1” to “3” and the set values “4” to “6”.

  In addition, the setting value effect of the third embodiment is executed in any special figure fluctuation effect, but is not executed in the special figure fluctuation effect of the jackpot or L-reach and SP reach. The execution condition of the value effect may be limited. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure fluctuation effect, it may be determined whether or not to execute the set value effect, and the set value effect may be executed only when it is determined that the set value effect is to be executed. .

  In addition, the set value effect of the third embodiment is executed in any of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage in the low-probability low-base game state, but only in the specific normal effect stage. It may be executed. Alternatively, as the production stage in the low-probability, low-base gaming state, the specific effect stage in which the set value effect is not executed in the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage and the set value effect is executable is the first normal effect stage. It is also possible to provide a stage other than the third normal effect stage and shift to a specific effect stage when a specific condition is satisfied.

  The specific conditions can be set as appropriate. For example, a specific condition is determined whether or not to shift to the specific effect stage at the end of each special figure fluctuating effect related to the loss, and it is set that it is determined to shift to the specific effect stage in the determination. Is also good. Further, the specific condition may be set to execute a specific effect such as an SP reach effect or a demo effect. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, a transition may be made to a specific effect stage from the special figure fluctuation effect started next. In this case, the background image may be a background image dedicated to a specific effect stage. Alternatively, the background image is not changed, but the image used for variably displaying the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be changed from the effect symbol G10 to the composite symbol G22.

  The set value effect is executed when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed. However, the execution time of the set value effect is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, the execution time of the set value effect is set when the reach is established, and when the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped when the reach is established, the shutter of the set value suggesting unit G22b is opened and the first set value is set. One of the symbol G23a, the second set value symbol G23b, and the third set value symbol G23c is displayed, and the set value displayed on the set value suggestion unit G22b for the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 at that time. The set value may be suggested by a combination of the symbols G23.

  Further, the shutter is displayed in the set value suggesting portion G22b until the set value design G23 is displayed in the set value effect, and the set value design G23 is hidden, but during the fluctuation display of the effect designs EZ1 to EZ3, The set value design G23 is visually recognizable, and may be variably displayed like, for example, a reel or a roulette of a so-called "turn-type gaming machine".

  Further, the set value effect of the third embodiment is executed only in the low-probability low-base game state, but may be executed in the high-probability high-base game state or the low-probability high-base game state. Alternatively, it may not be executed in the low-probability low-base game state, but may be executed in the high-probability high-base game state or the low-probability high-base game state.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute a set value effect indicating a set value under conditions different from those in the above-described first to third embodiments. Specifically, the set value effect is executed based on the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In the fourth embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configuration as the basic embodiment or the configuration corresponding to the same in the same manner.

  First, a description will be given of the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display that triggers the execution of the set value effect in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, when the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a specific number of times, a set value effect is executed when a jackpot is won. In the following, the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be referred to as “the number of times after application”.

  The specific number of times is related to a so-called "Zoro-eye". The specific number of times includes the number of times after the input whose last three digits are the same odd number, the number of times after the input where the last three digits are the same even number, the number of times after the input where the last two digits are the same odd number, and the last two digits. Is the same even number after the input. In the following, the number of times after the input whose lower three digits are the same odd number is referred to as “first odd number of times”, and the number of times after the input where the lower three digits are the same even number is “first even number of times”. The number of times after the input whose lower two digits are the same odd number is referred to as “second odd specific number”, and the number of times after the input where the lower two digits are the same even number is “second even number specific number”. Called. Note that the second odd number of times does not include the first odd number of times. In addition, the second even-number specific number does not include the first even-number specific number.

  Then, when the set value “3” or the set value “5” is set and the jackpot is won in the special figure variable display when the number of times after the insertion is the first specific odd number, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the In the big hit game according to the above, the set value effect indicating that the set value is 3 or 5 is executed. Specifically, a set value effect is executed between the final round game and the ending. Hereinafter, this set value effect is referred to as “odd-high setting suggestion effect”.

  When the set value “4” or the set value “6” is set and the jackpot is won in the special figure variable display when the number of times after the insertion is the first even number of times, the effect control microcomputer 121 In the big hit game, a set value effect indicating that the set value is 4 or 6 is executed. Specifically, a set value effect is executed between the final round game and the ending. Hereinafter, this set value effect is referred to as “even number high setting suggestion effect”.

  Then, when the set value “1”, the set value “3”, or the set value “5” is set, and a big hit is won in the special figure variable display when the number after insertion is the second odd number specific number, the effect control The microcomputer 121 executes a set value effect indicating that the set value is 1, 3, or 5 in the jackpot game relating to the jackpot. Specifically, a set value effect is executed between the opening and one round. Hereinafter, this set value effect is referred to as “odd number setting suggestive effect”.

  Then, when the set value “2”, the set value “4”, or the set value “6” is set, and a big hit is won in the special figure variable display when the number after the insertion is the second even number specific number, the effect control The microcomputer 121 executes a set value effect indicating that the set value is 2, 4, or 6, in the jackpot game relating to the jackpot. Specifically, a set value effect is executed between the opening and one round. Hereinafter, this set value effect is referred to as “even number setting suggestive effect”.

  Next, a specific example of the set value effect of the fourth embodiment will be described. First, an odd high setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, when the set value “3” or the set value “5” is set, and the number of times after the insertion is the first odd number specific number such as 555, 777, 1111, and 1333, the jackpot is won in the special figure variable display. Then Here, when the special figure variable display related to the big hit ends, the big hit game is started next, the round game progresses, and the last round game is performed as shown in FIG. 59 (A).

  Then, when the ending is started and it is attempted to switch from the round effect to the jackpot ending effect, an odd-number high setting suggestion effect is executed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), an image indicating that the set value is 3 or 5 (hereinafter, referred to as an “odd height setting image G31”) is cut into the entire display unit 50a. Is displayed.

  The odd height setting image G31 includes a back view of a player wearing a baseball uniform with a uniform number “35”. This number indicates that the set value is 3 or 5. In the odd-numbered height setting image G31, the player is urged to pay attention to the uniform number with the thumbs of both hands.

  Then, when the cut-in display of the odd-numbered high setting image G31, that is, the odd-numbered high setting suggesting effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the display is switched from the odd-numbered high setting image G31 to the ending background image G202 as shown in FIG. The odd-numbered high setting image G31 is deleted, the odd-numbered high setting suggesting effect ends, and the big hit ending effect starts.

  Next, the even high setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, when the set value “4” or the set value “6” is set, and the number of times after the insertion is the first even number specific number such as 666, 888, 1222, and 1444, the special figure variable display wins the jackpot. Then Here, when the special figure variable display related to the big hit ends, the big hit game is started next, the round game progresses, and the last round game is performed as shown in FIG. 60 (A).

  Then, when the ending is started and it is attempted to switch from the round effect to the jackpot ending effect, an even-high setting suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60B, an image indicating that the set value is 2 or 4 (hereinafter, referred to as an “even-high set image G32”) is cut in the entire display unit 50a. Is displayed.

  The even-height setting image G32 includes a back view of a player wearing a baseball uniform with a uniform number “46”. The number indicates that the set value is 4 or 6. In the even height setting image G32, the player is urged to pay attention to the uniform number with the thumbs of both hands.

  Then, when the cut-in display of the even-number high setting image G32, that is, the even-number high setting suggesting effect is performed for about 3 seconds, as shown in FIG. 60C, the even-number high setting image G32 is switched to the ending background image G202. The even-number high setting image G32 is deleted, the even-number high setting suggestion effect ends, and the big hit ending effect starts.

  Next, the odd number setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, when the set value “1”, the set value “3”, or the set value “5” is set, and the number of times after the insertion is the second odd specific number such as 55, 77, 133, and 211, the special figure. Suppose you win a jackpot with variable display. Here, when the special figure variable display related to the big hit ends, a big hit game is started, and a big hit opening effect is performed as shown in FIG. 61 (A).

  Then, when one round is started and it is attempted to switch from the jackpot opening effect to the round effect, an odd number setting suggesting effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61B, an image (hereinafter, referred to as an “odd number setting image G33”) indicating that the setting value is 1, 3, or 5 is cut on the entire display unit 50a. Is displayed.

  The odd-numbered setting image G33 includes a back view of the player wearing the baseball uniform with the uniform number “135”. The number indicates that the set value is 1, 3, or 5. In the odd-numbered setting image G33, the player is urged to pay attention to the uniform number with the thumbs of both hands.

  Then, when the cut-in display of the odd-numbered setting image G33, that is, the odd-numbered setting suggestion effect is performed for about three seconds, the odd-numbered setting image G33 is switched to the round background image G201 as shown in FIG. G33 is deleted, the odd number setting suggestion effect ends, and one round effect starts.

  Next, an even number setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, when the set value “2”, the set value “4”, or the set value “6” is set, and the number of times after the insertion is a second even number specific number such as 66, 88, 122, and 344, Suppose you win a jackpot with variable display. Here, when the special figure variable display related to the big hit ends, a big hit game is started, and a big hit opening effect is performed as shown in FIG. 62 (A).

  Then, when one round is started and it is going to switch from the jackpot opening effect to the round effect, an even number setting suggesting effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), an image suggesting that the set value is 2, 4 or 6 (hereinafter, referred to as “even number set image G34”) is cut on the entire display unit 50a. Is displayed.

  The even-numbered setting image G34 includes a back view of a player wearing a baseball uniform with a uniform number “246”. The number indicates that the set value is 2, 4, or 6. In the even-numbered setting image G34, the player is prompted to pay attention to the uniform number with the thumbs of both hands.

  Then, when the cut-in display of the even-number setting image G34, that is, the even-number setting suggestion effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the even-number setting image G34 is switched to the round background image G201 as shown in FIG. G34 is deleted, the even number setting suggestion effect ends, and one round effect is started.

  Next, a process for determining whether or not the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the set value effect will be described with reference to FIG. This process is executed as a set value effect determination process immediately after the special figure change effect ending process when it is determined in step S4305 of the received command analysis process (S4201) that the special figure change start command has been received.

  In the set value effect determination process, first, at step S5101, the effect control microcomputer 121 adds “1” to the counter value of the after-insertion number counter that counts the number of times after insertion. The after-insertion number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and “1” is added each time the set value effect determination processing is performed.

  Next, in step S5102, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the big hit change is to be started from now on the basis of the stored special figure change start command or the like. The effect control microcomputer 121 ends the set value effect determination process when it is determined that the jackpot variation does not start, and when it determines that the jackpot variation starts, in step S5103, it checks the post-insertion number counter and determines the number of times after the insertion. It is determined whether the three digits are the same.

  If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the last three digits are not the same number, the process proceeds to step S5109, and if it determines that the last three digits are the same, in step S5104, it checks the number-of-times-after-insertion counter and checks the lower three digits. Is an odd same number. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5107 when determining that the last three digits are not the same odd number, and proceeds to step S5105 when determining that the last three digits are the same odd number.

  In step S5105, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag that has been set, and determines whether the set value is 3 or 5. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is neither 3 nor 5, the process proceeds to step S5112, and if it is determined that the set value is 3 or 5, in step S5106, the odd high setting suggestion effect flag is set for the effect. The set value effect flag area of the RAM 124 is set, and the set value effect determination processing ends.

  In step S5107, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag that has been set, and determines whether the set value is 4 or 6. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is neither 4 nor 6, the process proceeds to step S5114, and if it is determined that the set value is 3 or 5, in step S5108, an even high setting suggestion effect flag is set for the effect. It is set in the set value effect flag area of the RAM 124, and the set value effect execution determination processing ends.

  Also, in step S5109, effect control microcomputer 121 checks the after-insertion number counter to determine whether the last two digits of the after-insertion number are the same. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the lower two digits are not the same number, it ends the set value effect determination process, and when it determines that the lower two digits are the same number, it checks the number-of-times-after-insertion counter in step S5110. , It is determined whether the last two digits are odd and the same number. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5113 when determining that the last two digits are not the same odd number, and proceeds to step S5111 when determining that the last two digits are the same odd number.

  In step S5111, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag that has been set, and determines whether the set value is 1, 3, or 5. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is not any of 1, 3, or 5, it ends the set value effect determination process, and if it determines that the set value is 1, 3, or 5, proceeds to step S5112. .

  In step S5112, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the odd number setting suggestion effect flag in the set value effect flag area of the effect RAM 124, and ends the set value effect determination process.

  In step S5113, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag that has been set, and determines whether the set value is 2, 4, or 6. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is not any of 2, 4, or 6, it ends the set value effect determination process, and if it determines that the set value is 2, 4, or 6, the process proceeds to step S5114. .

  In step S5114, effect control microcomputer 121 sets the even number setting suggestion effect flag in the set value effect flag area of effect RAM 124, and ends the set value effect determination process.

  When the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the odd high setting suggestive effect flag, the even high setting suggestive effect flag, the odd setting suggestive effect flag, or the even setting suggestive effect flag, the big hit game based on the set value effect flag is set. The image control board 140 executes an odd high setting suggesting effect, an even high setting suggesting effect, an odd setting suggesting effect, or an even setting suggesting effect.

  For example, when the odd high setting suggestion effect flag or the even high setting suggestion effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the ending effect start process (S4318) the odd number indicating the effect content of the odd high setting suggestion effect. A high setting suggestion effect start command or an even number high setting suggestion effect start command indicating the effect content of the even number high setting suggestion effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set odd number high setting suggestion effect start command or the even number high setting suggestion effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004).

  When the image control board 140 receives the odd high setting suggestion effect start command or the even high setting suggestion effect start command, at the start of the ending, the odd high setting image G31 or the even high setting image G32 of the display unit 50a is displayed. The odd high setting image G31 or the even high setting image G32 is cut-in and displayed on the whole to perform the odd high setting suggesting effect or the even high setting suggesting effect, and then the big hit ending effect is performed.

  When the odd setting suggestion effect flag or the even number setting suggestion effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts the odd number setting suggestion effect indicating the effect content of the odd number setting suggestion effect at the start of the opening effect (S4314). A command or an even number setting suggestion effect start command indicating the effect content of the even number setting suggestion effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set odd number setting suggestion effect start command or even number setting suggestion effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by a command transmission process (S4004).

  Then, when receiving the odd number setting suggestion effect start command or the even number setting suggestion effect start command, the image control board 140 displays the odd number setting image G33 or the even number setting image G34 immediately before the end of the opening and the round game starts. After the odd-numbered setting image G33 or the even-numbered setting image G34 is cut-in and displayed on the entire display unit 50a and the odd-numbered setting suggestion effect or the even-numbered setting suggestion effect is executed, a round game effect is performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth embodiment, when the setting value is set to an odd number, if the lower two digits or the lower three digits of the number of insertions are odd and the same number, the jackpot is won, A set value suggestion effect indicating that an odd set value is set is executed. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth embodiment, when the set value is set to an even number, if the jackpot is won when the lower two digits or the lower three digits of the number of insertions are the same even number, the even number is set. A suggestion setting value effect indicating that the setting value is set is executed. As described above, since the set value effect indicating the set value is executed based on the post-insert count having relevance to the set value, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the post-insert count, and the gaming interest is improved. .

  In addition, when the lower three digits that occur relatively infrequently have the same number, the set value effect with a narrower set value range is executed, so that the set value effect can be sharpened. Interestingness improves.

(Modification of Fourth Embodiment)
The setting value effect in the fourth embodiment is executed using the odd-numbered high setting image G31, the even-numbered high setting image G32, the odd-numbered setting image G33, and the even-numbered setting image G34, but the design of the image is not limited to this and may be appropriately adjusted. May be set. The number setting image G31, the even number setting image G32, the odd number setting image G33, and the even number setting image G34 are collectively referred to as "setting value suggestion images G31 to G34".

  In addition, the setting value effect is performed by, for example, displaying the setting value suggestion images G31 to G34 on the entire display unit 50a by cut-in display, but the display mode is not limited to this and may be set as appropriate. . For example, the set value effect may be executed by displaying an object image that is not the entire display unit 50a on the display unit 50a. The set value effect may be executed using specific elements of the opening background image G200, the round background image G201, and the ending background image G202, for example, the type, color, size, and shape of the character. Further, the set value effect may be executed using another effect device such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the panel movable device 55 instead of or in addition to the image display device 50. . Further, the effect contents of all four set value effects may be the same. In this case, only the number of times after the insertion is a key for specifying the set value suggested by the set value effect, so that the interest in the game is improved.

  Furthermore, the set value effect of the fourth embodiment is a jackpot game, specifically, the odd high setting suggestion effect and the even high setting suggestion effect are executed between the round effect and the jackpot ending effect, and the odd number setting suggestion effect. , And the even number setting suggestion effect are executed between the jackpot opening effect and the round effect, but the execution timing is not limited to these, and may be appropriately executed. Further, the execution time of the four set value effects may be set to the same time or may be set to different times. Alternatively, a plurality of executable times of the set value effect may be set, and the execution time may be determined by a predetermined lottery.

  Further, the set value effect of the fourth embodiment is executed in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won in a specific number of times after the insertion, but is performed in the special figure variable display related to the jackpot. May be. For example, the set value effect may be executed at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the jackpot, at the time of reaching a reach, at the time of SP reach development, or at a specific timing of the special figure variable effect. .

  In addition, the condition for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment includes a jackpot winning, but instead of the jackpot winning, an SP reach or a specific SP reach having a relatively high jackpot expectation is used. The execution of a specific effect may be set as a condition for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment. In this case, the set value effect may be executed at a specific timing of the special figure fluctuation effect in which the specific effect is executed.

  Further, the condition for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment includes that the last two digits or the last three digits of the number of times after insertion are the same number, but the condition is not limited to this. May be set as appropriate. For example, it may be set as an execution condition of the set value effect that a value obtained by adding the respective digits of the number after the insertion is an odd number or an even number. And, for example, if the set value is an odd number, if a value is obtained by adding each digit of the number of times after insertion is an odd number, if a jackpot is won, a set value effect indicating that the set value is an odd number is executed, and the setting is performed. When the value is an even number, if a jackpot is won when the value obtained by adding each digit of the number of times after insertion is an even number, a set value effect indicating that the set value is an even number may be executed.

  Further, the condition of the number of times after input for executing the set value effect may be any one of the last two digits or the last three digits of the number of times after input. Furthermore, when the lower four digits of the number of times after inputting the condition of the number of times after input for executing the set value effect, or the lower five digits become a zigzag, an effect of notifying the set value may be performed. . In addition, the upper two digits or the upper three digits of the number of insertions may be set as the condition of the number of insertions for executing the set value effect.

  The types of the set value effects are an odd number setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value is 1, 3, or 5, an odd number high setting suggestion effect indicating that the setting value is 3 or 5, and a setting value. Is an even number setting suggestion effect that suggests that it is 2, 4, or 6, and an even number high setting suggestion effect that suggests that the set value is 4 or 6. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is also good. For example, only some of these types of set value effects may be executable. Also, for example, an odd low setting suggestion effect indicating that the set value is 1 or 3 and an even low setting suggestion effect indicating that the set value is 2 or 4 can be executed. Is also good.

  Further, in the setting value effect execution determination processing, if it is determined in step S5105 that the setting value is not 3 or 5, the process proceeds to step S5112, and an odd number setting suggestion effect is to be executed. If it is determined in step S5107 that the set value is not 4 or 6, the flow advances to step S5114 to execute an even number setting suggestion effect. However, if it is determined in step S5105 that the set value is not 3 or 5, or if it is determined in step S5107 that the set value is not 4 or 6, the set value effect determination processing ends, and the odd number setting suggestive effect or the even number setting is performed. The suggestion effect may not be executed.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the set value effect is executed based on the number of executions of the variable display of the special figure after the power is turned on, but the effect related to the set value is executed based on the number of executions of the big hit game after the power is turned on. You may do it. Alternatively, an effect relating to a set value may be executed based on the number of times a specific jackpot game is executed after the power is turned on. As a specific jackpot game here, a jackpot game in which a game is controlled in a high probability high base gaming state after the jackpot game, a jackpot game in which a game is controlled in a high probability state after the jackpot game, A big hit game in which the game is controlled in the time saving state after the big hit game may be set.

  The execution timing of the effect on the set value in this case can be set as appropriate, but in the big hit game, the effect on the set value may be executed, or the effect on the set value is executed in the probability change mode or the time saving mode thereafter. Is also good. Alternatively, an effect relating to the set value may be executed in the first demonstration effect thereafter. Further, in the special figure fluctuation effect before the jackpot game is performed, an effect relating to the set value may be executed.

  Generally, the number of executions of the jackpot game is very small compared to the number of executions of the variable display of the special figure. If the last two digits are the same number, a set value effect indicating a set value that has a one-to-one correspondence with the set value set as in the first embodiment may be executed. Alternatively, if the set value is 1 to 3, a low setting suggestion effect indicating that the set value is relatively low is executed, and if the set value is 4 to 6, it is determined that the set value is a relatively low set value. A suggested high setting suggestion effect may be executed.

  In addition, as an execution condition of the effect related to the set value, the number of executions of the jackpot game or the specific jackpot game after the power is turned on may be set to a specific number of times such as 10 times or 20 times. Furthermore, as the execution condition of the effect relating to the set value, the so-called “number of consecutive chan” may be set to a specific number such as 10 or 20 times. Further, the last two digits of the so-called “number of consecutive chan” may be set to be the same number. In addition, the number of consecutive chan is the number of times the big hit game is continuously executed without the normal game state after the big hit game is executed, and includes a so-called “pull-back”. However, the number of consecutive chans may not include the pullback.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the fifth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute a set value effect indicating a set value using the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation. In the fifth embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configuration as the basic embodiment or the configuration corresponding to the same in the same manner.

  In the fifth embodiment, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variably displayed using the same effect symbol G10 as in the basic embodiment. However, as for the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation, the stop display of the effect symbol EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation also serving as the set value effect, and the display of the effect of the normal fluctuation EZ1 to EZ3 not serving as the set value effect. It differs from the basic embodiment in that there is a stop display.

  First, an example of the stop symbol pattern determination process including a process of determining whether or not to perform the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation that also serves as the set value effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the stop symbol pattern determination process, first, at step S5201, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure variation pattern indicated by the stored special figure variation start command is a normal variation. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5206 if it is not normal fluctuation, and if it is normal fluctuation, acquires the value indicated by the set value effect execution determination random number counter as the set value effect execution determination random number in step S5202. In S5203, a set value effect execution determination is performed based on the acquired set value effect execution determination random number. The random number counter for setting value effect execution determination is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed updating process in step S4003.

  The setting value effect execution determination is executed using the setting value effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 65, the set value effect execution determination table includes a set value effect execution determination table used when the special figure variation pattern is normal A loss variation, and a set value effect execution determination table when the special figure variation pattern is normal B loss variation. There is a set value effect execution determination table used and a set value effect execution determination table used when the special figure variation pattern is the normal C loss variation. That is, a plurality of set value effect execution determination tables are provided in association with the special figure change pattern related to the normal change. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one set value effect execution determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern at the time of the set value effect execution determination.

  In each set value effect execution determination table, the value of the set value effect execution determination random number (set value effect execution determination value) is determined based on whether the set value effect is executable or not so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 65 is obtained. Has been sorted. The set value effect execution determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

  In the set value effect execution determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired set value effect execution determination random number with the selected set value effect execution determination table, and determines whether to execute the set value effect. Then, in step S5204, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the set value effect as a result of the set value effect execution determination. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5205 when determining to execute the set value effect, and proceeds to step S5206 when determining not to execute the set value effect.

  In step S5205, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a set value effect stop symbol pattern determination table for performing stop display of the reach-less loss effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 which also serves as the set value effect. In addition, in step S5206, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the normal stop symbol pattern determination table for performing the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that do not serve as the set value effect.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the stop symbol pattern determination table for set value effect is associated with the set value. Specifically, the stop symbol pattern determination table for setting value effect includes a stop symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is “1”, a stop symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is “2”, Stop symbol pattern judgment table used when the value is "3", stop symbol pattern judgment table used when the set value is "4", stop symbol pattern judgment table used when the set value is "5", and set value There is a stop symbol pattern determination table used for “6”. Therefore, in step S5205, effect control microcomputer 121 selects one set value symbol pattern determination table associated with the set value.

  In each set value effect stop symbol pattern determination table, a stop symbol pattern determination random number value (stop symbol pattern determination value) is allocated to the stop symbol pattern so that the selectivity (%) shown in FIG. 66 is obtained. I have.

  As shown in FIGS. 67 to 68, the normal stop symbol pattern determination table is associated with stop symbols and special figure change patterns. Specifically, in the normal stop symbol determination table, a stop symbol pattern determination table used when the stop special figure is the big hit symbol A or the big hit symbol D, the stop special figure is the big hit symbol B, the big hit symbol C, the big hit Stop symbol pattern determination table used when the symbol E or the big hit symbol F, stop symbol pattern determination table used when the special figure variation pattern is lost with reach, and when the special figure variation pattern is loss without reach There is a stop symbol pattern determination table used. Therefore, in step S5206, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the normal stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop symbol indicated by the symbol designation command or the special symbol change pattern indicated by the special symbol change start command.

  In each of the normal stop symbol pattern determination tables, the value of the stop symbol pattern determination random number (stop symbol pattern determination value) is allocated to the stop symbol pattern so that the selectivity (%) shown in FIGS. ing.

  In step S5207, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as the stop symbol pattern determination random number, and in step S5208, acquires the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number in step S5205 or A stop symbol pattern determination for determining a stop symbol pattern is performed by collating with the stop symbol pattern determination table selected in step S5206. The stopped symbol pattern determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the stop symbol pattern data representing the determined stop symbol pattern in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 in step S5209, and in step S5210, the stop symbol pattern command representing the determined stop symbol pattern. Is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the stopped symbol pattern determination processing ends.

  When the effect symbol command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 reads a predetermined effect symbol from the image ROM 142. G10 is read out, and on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the stop symbol pattern indicated by the stop symbol pattern command, and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed.

  Here, the set value effect using the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 66, six types of stop symbol patterns relating to the set value effect are set, ie, a stop symbol pattern 61 to a stop symbol pattern 66. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed with these six stop symbol patterns also serves as a set value effect.

  The stop symbol pattern 61 is composed of 1 (blue), 3 (red), and 5 (blue) stop symbols. Since the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 61 are all odd numbers, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 61 indicates that the set value is an odd number.

  The stop symbol pattern 62 is composed of 2 (blue), 4 (blue), and 6 (blue) stop symbols. Since the numbers included in the effect symbols G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 62 are all even numbers, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 62 indicates that the set value is an even number.

  The stop symbol pattern 63 is composed of 1 (blue), 2 (blue), and 3 (red) stop symbols. Since the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 63 all represent relatively low set values among the set values, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 63 is as follows. This indicates that the setting value is low.

  The stop symbol pattern 64 is composed of 4 (blue), 5 (blue), and 6 (blue) stop symbols. Since the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 64 all represent relatively high set values among the set values, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 64 is as follows. It indicates that the setting value is high.

  The stop symbol pattern 65 is composed of 6 (blue), 5 (blue), 1 (blue) stop symbols. When read from the left, the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 that constitutes the stop symbol pattern 65 are “mu (6) go (5) i (1)”, which is a word meaning “warm”. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 65 indicates that the set value “1” is the most unfavorable to the player.

  The stop symbol pattern 66 is composed of 3 (blue), 1 (blue), and 5 (blue) stop effect symbols. When read from the left, the numbers included in the effect symbol G10 that constitutes the stop symbol pattern 66 become a word “sa (3) i (1) ko (5)” meaning “highest degree”. Therefore, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed in the stop symbol pattern 66 indicates that the set value “6” is the most advantageous for the player.

  When the set value is “1”, the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 60%, the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 35%, and the stop symbol pattern 65 is selected with a probability of 5%. When the set value is “2”, the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 55%, and the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 45%. When the set value is “3”, the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 45%, and the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 55%. When the set value is “4”, the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 60%. When the set value is “5”, the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 35%, and the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 65%. When the set value is “6”, the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 25%, the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 70%, and the stop symbol pattern 66 is selected with a probability of 5%.

  In addition, the stop symbol pattern according to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal variation that does not also serve as the set value effect, and the stop symbol pattern according to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal variation that also serves as the set value effect, Are not duplicated. Hereinafter, the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal fluctuation which also serves as the set value effect is referred to as “specific stop symbol pattern”. In addition, the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the normally varying effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 which does not double as the set value effect is referred to as “non-specific stop symbol pattern”.

  As described above, in the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the no-reach losing, the set value effect is executed by the display content of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, specifically, the numeral portion included in the effect symbol G10. By paying attention to the stop display of the effect design EZ1 to EZ3 of the no-reach losing which the player is not most interested in, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game and to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, as for the set values “2” to “5”, a stop symbol that directly indicates the set value, such as the stop symbol pattern 65 or the stop symbol pattern 66 for the set value “1” or the set value “6”. Although the symbol pattern is not set, the set value can be estimated by the combination of the appearing stop symbol patterns. Since the set value is suggested by the combination of the stop symbol patterns that appear in this manner, the interest in the game is further improved.

  As for the stop symbol pattern 61, the selection rate is high in the order of the set value “1”> the set value “3”> the set value “5”. Further, with respect to the stop symbol pattern 62, the selection rate is high in the order of the set value “2”> the set value “4”> the set value “6”. As for the stop symbol pattern 63, the selectivity is high in the order of the set value “3”> the set value “2”> the set value “1”. Further, with respect to the stop symbol pattern 64, the selection rate is high in the order of the set value “6”> the set value “5”> the set value “4”. As described above, the predetermined stop symbol pattern can appear with a plurality of set values, and the selectivity differs depending on the set value. Therefore, the set value can be estimated based on the appearance frequency of the stop symbol pattern. Therefore, the entertainment interest of the game is improved.

(Modification of the fifth embodiment)
The stop effect symbols constituting the specific stop symbol pattern are not limited to the stop effect symbols shown in FIG. 66, and may be set appropriately. In addition to the losing without reach, the set value effect may be executed by the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the losing with reach and the jackpot. Also, the set value effect is performed when it is determined that the set value effect is to be executed by the set value effect determination, but the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to this, and may be set as appropriate. For example, after the SP reach loss fluctuation, the set value production execution condition is that the special figure fluctuation production of the no-reach losing is performed in a specific period such as a predetermined number of times, for example, during the execution of 10 special figure fluctuation productions. May be.

<Sixth embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the sixth embodiment, when the set value is high, the effect of the effect content that does not appear when the set value is low is performed. As an example, when the setting value is high, a large hit may occur with the effect content that does not become a big hit when the setting value is low. The sixth embodiment will mainly describe points different from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configuration as the basic embodiment or the configuration corresponding to the same in the same manner.

  As described above, for example, when the content of the SP reach is composed of a confrontation scene of a baseball pitcher and a batter, if the special figure variation pattern related to the special figure variation production is SP loss variation, the SP reach proceeds. After reaching the turning point, the enemy character hits a home run and defeats the confrontation, and the hero character is discouraged on the mound. (FIG. 26 (A-2), FIG. 26 (B-2), FIG. 26 (C-2)). If there is a special figure suspension, the next special figure fluctuation effect is immediately executed.

  Here, in the sixth embodiment, when the set value is 5 or 6, when the winning / losing branch point is reached in the SP reach relating to the jackpot (FIG. 69 (A)), the enemy character hits a home run and then confronts (FIG. 69 (B)), and after the hero character is discouraged on the mound to perform a loss notification effect (FIG. 69 (C)), the directing symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the jackpot and the small symbol KZ1 remain unchanged. To KZ3 are stopped (FIG. 69 (D)), and the opening effect of the jackpot game is entered (FIG. 69 (E)).

  As described above, when the setting value is set to 5 or 6, when the setting value is other than 5 or 6, the setting value becomes a big hit with the effect content that appears only in the special figure fluctuation effect related to the loss, and the setting value is changed. It is suggested to be set to 5 or 6. In the following, such a production in which the production contents are reversed to become a jackpot is referred to as “success or failure reversal production”. And the success / failure reversal effect constitutes a set value effect indicating that the set value is the relatively high set value 5 or the set value 6.

  In the sixth embodiment, in the case of a big hit when the set value is set to 5 or 6, the success / failure reversal effect is not necessarily executed but a success / failure reversal effect is executed with a predetermined probability. That is, when the set value is set to 5 or 6, there is a case where the success / failure reversal effect is executed and a big hit occurs, and a case where the success / failure reversal effect is not executed and a big hit occurs as usual. In the sixth embodiment, the success or failure reversal effect may be executed in SP reach or L reach.

  In the sixth embodiment, three types of SP reach, SP reach A to SP reach C, are set as the SP reach. Further, three types of L reach, L reach A to L reach C, are set for the L reach. In each of the SP reach and each L reach, the effect contents related to the win / loss and success / failure are set. And basically, a jackpot will eventually win or succeed, while a losing will ultimately lose or fail. Here, the reason why "basically" is set is that a success / failure reversal effect may be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the effect of SP reach A is a confrontation between a hero character as a pitcher and a batter A of an enemy team OO. The effect of SP Reach B is a confrontation between the hero character as a pitcher and the batter B of the enemy team II. The effect of SP Reach C is a confrontation between a hero character as a pitcher and a batter C of an enemy team XX.

  Then, in the normal SP reach A in the case of the SP jackpot fluctuation, the main character finally strikes out the batter A and wins the confrontation. Similarly, in the normal SP reach B in the case of the SP jackpot fluctuation, the main character finally strikes out the batter B and wins the confrontation. In SP reach C in the case of SP jackpot fluctuation, the main character finally strikes out batter C and wins the confrontation.

  On the other hand, in the normal SP reach A in the case of SP loss fluctuation, the main character finally hits a home run by the batter A and loses the confrontation. Similarly, in the normal SP reach B in the case of SP loss fluctuation, the main character finally hits a home run by the batter B and loses the confrontation. In SP reach C in the case of SP loss variation, finally, the main character hits a home run by batter C and wins the defeat in the confrontation. Here, the "normal" SP reach A to SP reach C are used, because the success / failure reversal effect may be performed.

  The effect content of L-reach A is special training for the hero character to learn a new technique. The effect of L Reach B is a confession to a woman who likes the hero character. The content of L Reach C's production is to run for the student council president.

  Then, in the normal L-reach A in the case of the SP jackpot fluctuation, the new skill acquisition is successful. Similarly, in the normal L-reach B in the case of the SP jackpot fluctuation, the confession is finally succeeded. In L-reach C where the SP jackpot changes, the student president is elected.

  On the other hand, in the normal L-reach A in the case of SP loss variation, acquisition of a new technique fails. Similarly, the confession ultimately fails in the normal L reach B in the case of SP loss fluctuation. In L-reach C in the case of SP loss, the student is lost to the student council president. Here, the "normal" L-reach A to L-reach C are used because the reversal effect may be performed in some cases.

  As described above, the SP reach and the L reach of the jackpot are the production contents that ultimately win or succeed. On the other hand, the SP reach and the L reach of the losing are the contents of the production that eventually loses or fails. Therefore, when the success / failure reversal effect is executed in the case of the jackpot, after the final defeat or failure, the jackpot is suddenly and unexpectedly notified by the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the jackpot.

  Specifically, in the case of SP Reach A, in a confrontation between the hero character and the batter A, a staging pattern indicating a jackpot after the hero character is finally defeated by a home run by the batter A and defeated in the confrontation The stop display of EZ1 to EZ3 is performed (see FIG. 69). Similarly, in SP reach B, in the confrontation between the protagonist character and the batter B, the home character is finally hit by the batter B and the protagonist character defeats the confrontation and is discouraged. A stop display is performed. In SP reach C, in the confrontation between the protagonist character and the batter C, the home character is finally hit by the batter C and the protagonist character defeats the confrontation and is discouraged. Done.

  In L-reach A, after the hero character has failed in special training because of the special training of new skills acquisition and finally failed to learn the new skills, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the jackpot is performed. . Similarly, in the case of L reach B, in the confession to the favorite woman, the protagonist character finally fails to confess and is discouraged by the favorite woman, and then stops the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the jackpot. Display is performed. In L-reach C, in the election of the student council president, after the character is finally lost as a student council president and the protagonist character fails in the election and is discouraged, the stop symbols of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the jackpot are displayed.

  Here, the probability ("selection rate" in FIG. 70) that SP reach A to SP reach C and L reach A to L reach C are selected is set as shown in FIG. The value of the random number for special figure fluctuation pattern determination (special figure fluctuation pattern determination value) is appropriately allocated to various effects so that the selection rate shown in FIG. 70 is obtained.

  In the case of a jackpot, the selectivity is high in the order of SP reach A> SP reach B> SP reach C. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, the selectivity is high in the order of SP reach C> SP reach B> SP reach A. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the jackpot is won in the order of SP reach A> SP reach B> SP reach C.

  In the case of a big hit, the selectivity is high in the order of L reach A> L reach B> L reach C. On the other hand, in the case of loss, the selectivity is high in the order of L reach C> L reach B> L reach A. Therefore, there is a high possibility that the jackpot is won in the order of L reach A> L reach B> L reach C.

  Next, an example of a process of determining whether or not to execute the success / reverse effect will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Hereinafter, this processing is referred to as success / failure reversal effect determination processing. As the success / failure reversal effect determination process, for example, the process shown in FIG. 71 is performed. The effect control microcomputer 121 executes the special figure variation effect pattern command representing the special figure variation effect pattern in the special figure variation effect start process of step S4306. Can be performed after setting in a predetermined area.

  In the success / failure reversal effect determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5301 whether the special figure change pattern indicated by the stored special figure change start command is the SP jackpot change or the L jackpot change, It is determined whether to execute the jackpot SP reach effect or the jackpot L reach effect. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure variation pattern is not the SP jackpot variation or the L jackpot variation, the process ends the success / fail reversal effect determination processing and returns to the special figure variation production start processing, and the special figure variation pattern changes to the SP jackpot variation. Or, if it is determined that the change is the L jackpot change, the process advances to step S5302.

  In step S5302, effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag and determines whether the set value is set to “5” or “6”. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is not set to “5” or “6”, the effect control microcomputer 121 ends the success / failure reversal effect determination process, returns to the special figure variation effect start process, and sets the value to “5”. Or, if it is determined that “6” has been set, the process advances to step S5303.

  In step S5303, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a success / failure reverse effect determination table. The success / failure reversal effect determination table is a data table used when performing a success / failure reversal effect determination for determining whether to execute the success / failure reversal effect. As shown in FIG. 72, the success / failure reversal effect determination table is first associated with a set value. Furthermore, the success / failure reversal effect determination table associated with the set value is associated with the type of effect, specifically, the type of SP reach or the type of L reach.

  Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value and the effect type with reference to the set value flag stored in the effect RAM 124 and the special figure variation effect pattern data, and determines the set value and the effect type. Select the success / failure reversal effect execution determination table associated with.

  In each success / failure reversal effect execution determination table, a value of a success / failure reversal effect determination random number (success / reverse reversal effect determination value) is assigned to the success / failure reversal effect determination whether or not execution of the success / failure reversal effect is performed such that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 72 is obtained. ing. The success / failure reversal effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

  Next, in step S5304, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the success / failure reversal effect determination random number counter as the success / failure reversal effect determination random number, and in step S5305, acquires the acquired success / failure reversal effect determination random number in step S5305. The success / failure reversal effect determination is performed by collating with the success / failure reversal effect determination table selected in S5303. The success / fail reversal effect determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  Subsequently, in step S5306, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether to execute the success / failure reverse effect as a result of the success / failure reverse effect determination. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the success / failure reversal effect is not to be executed, the effect control microcomputer 121 immediately ends the success / failure reversal effect determination process and returns to the special figure variation effect start process. Is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the success / failure reversal effect execution determination processing ends, and the process returns to the special figure variation effect start processing.

  When the success / fail reversal effect command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 performs L reach or SP reach. At this time, the success or failure reversal effect is executed by displaying on the display unit 50a an image relating to the L-reach or SP-reach of the effect contents that would otherwise be lost, and finally the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the jackpot. Perform stop display.

  In addition, according to the success / failure reversal effect determination table according to the sixth embodiment, for each type of effect, the selectivity for the execution of the success / failure reversal effect is higher when the setting value is “6” than when the setting value is “5”. It is set high. Therefore, when the success / failure reversal effect is executed, the set value “6” can be more expected than the set value “5”. Further, for each set value, the possibility that the success / failure reversal effect is executed in the order of SP reach C> SP reach B> SP reach A is set to be high. Similarly, the possibility that the success / failure reversal effect is executed in the order of L reach C> L reach B> L reach A is set high. These orders correspond to the order of probabilities selected in the case of a loss for the same reach effect. That is, the tendency of the selectivity for the execution of the success / reverse effect and the tendency of the expectation degree of the loss for the same reach effect match. Therefore, while the original function of the reach production is prevented from being impaired as much as possible, the entertainment entertainment is improved by the reversal success / reduction production.

  As described above, in the sixth embodiment, by executing the success / reverse effect, the jackpot is produced with a different theory from the normal theory, so that the player can be surprised and can experience the freshness. Furthermore, since the set value is suggested in that, the entertainment interest of the game is improved. In addition, since the success / failure reversal effect is executed when the set values “5” and “6” are relatively high, the mood of the player can be enhanced. Furthermore, since the success or failure reversal effect is executed at the time of the big hit, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to play.

(Modification of the sixth embodiment)
The success / fail reversal effect may be executed in SP reach or L reach, but the type of effect in which the success / fail reversal effect is executed may be appropriately set without limitation. The success / fail reversal effect may be executed only in the SP reach. In addition, the success / failure reversal effect may be performed only in L reach. Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be performed in some types of SP reach or L reach such as SP reach A or L reach A, for example. Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed in an effect other than SP reach and L reach.

  Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed when the set value is “5” or “6”, but the set value at which the success / failure reversal effect is executed may be appropriately set without limitation. For example, the success or failure reversal effect may be performed only with one specific set value such as the set value “6”. Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed when the set value is the highest set value and the lowest set value such as the set values “6” and “1”.

  Further, the specific effect contents of the success / failure reversal effect are not limited to the effect contents shown in FIG. 69, and may be appropriately set. In addition, instead of performing an effect that suggests a set value with the effect content having a story like the above-described success / reversal effect, the light emission mode that appears only when the set value is “5” or “6”, for example, The frame lamp 53 may emit light. Similarly, the panel movable device 55 may be operated in an operation mode that appears only when the set value is “5” or “6”. Further, a sound that appears only when the set value is “5” or “6” may be output from the speaker 52. These are not limited to the special figure fluctuation production, but may be performed in a jackpot game production or a demonstration production.

  Furthermore, the success / failure reversal production is performed in a special figure change production, and as a success / failure reversal production, a performance with a function that basically suggests a loss such as defeat or failure is performed, and then a jackpot game is performed. The application scene of the reversal of success / failure is not limited to this. For example, a so-called "rank-up bonus" round game is performed, and in this round game, at the branch point of whether or not the round game is continued, the round game is continued if it is a content of success or victory, It is assumed that the round game ends if the content of the effect is failure or defeat. Then, when the set value “5” or “6” is set, the success / failure reversal effect is executed in this scene, and the game fails or loses, but the round game may be continued.

  Also, in the jackpot game, a high-probability state is set after the jackpot game if the effect is ultimately a success or victory, and a high-probability state is set after the jackpot game if the effect is ultimately a failure or a defeat. Suppose not. When the set value “5” or “6” is set, the success / failure reversal effect is executed in this scene, and the effect content is that the game ultimately fails or defeats. May be set.

  Furthermore, when the high probability state is set in the same production mode after the jackpot game, a plurality of types of the high probability specified number are provided, and in a situation where the special figure variable display is continuously executed in the high probability state, a certain high probability specified It is assumed that when the special figure variable display relating to the number of times is being executed, an effect of whether or not the high probability state continues is executed as a branch point of whether or not the high probability state continues. This effect is a predetermined confrontation or mission. Basically, if the high probability state continues, the player wins in a confrontation or succeeds in a mission. On the other hand, if the high probability state does not continue, you will lose in a confrontation or fail in a mission. When the set value “5” or “6” is set, the success / failure rendition is performed in this scene, and the game is defeated in the confrontation or failed in the mission, but the high probability state can be continued. You may do it.

  Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be performed using the loss variation. For example, if the game is originally defeated and loses, it is suggested that the set value is “5” or “6” by performing a reversal of success or failure where the player wins the show and loses. Is also good. In this case, since it is found that the set value is high even though the player has lost the game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Further, in the success / failure reversal determination, the tendency of the probability of determining to execute the success / failure reversal effect may be appropriately set. For example, in the case of the setting value “5” and the case of the setting value “6”, the probability of determining that the success / failure reversal effect is to be executed for each type of effect may be set to be the same. Further, the setting value and the probability of determining to execute the success / failure reverse effect regardless of the type of effect may be set to be constant. Further, for each set value, the probability of determining to execute the success / reverse rendition effect in the order of SP reach A> SP reach B> SP reach C and in the order of L reach A> L reach B> L reach C increases. May be set as follows. That is, the tendency of the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the type of the reach effect and the tendency of the probability of determining to execute the success / failure reversal effect may be matched.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the seventh embodiment, when the number of times the special figure variable display is continuously executed without winning a jackpot reaches a predetermined number, a set value effect indicating a set value is executed. A plurality of the predetermined times are set, and as the predetermined times increase, it becomes easier to determine the set value that has been set. In the following, the number of times the special figure variable display is continuously executed without winning the jackpot is referred to as “additional number”. Further, the seventh embodiment will mainly describe points different from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configuration as the basic embodiment or the configuration corresponding to the same in the same manner.

  As described above, various effect modes are set in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and various background images are displayed on the display unit 50a according to the effect modes. For example, when the normal effect mode is set, any one of the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 is displayed on the display unit 50a.

  In the seventh embodiment, when the normal effect mode is set, a setting value suggestion background image G140 may be displayed in addition to the normal background images G111 to G113. The fact that the setting value suggestion background image G140 is displayed is also referred to as “stay in the setting value suggestion zone”. The setting value suggestion background image G140 is displayed when the number of add-on times reaches a predetermined number. That is, when the number of hammering reaches a predetermined number, the vehicle enters the set value suggesting zone. When the set value suggestion background image G140 is displayed, in other words, by staying in the set value suggestion zone, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is suggested. Hereinafter, displaying the setting value suggestion background image G140 and staying in the setting value suggestion zone are also referred to as execution of the setting value effect.

  Specifically, when the number of add-on times reaches 500, 750, and 1000, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, or the third normal background image displayed at that time is displayed. The display switches from the image G113 to the setting value suggestion background image G140. The set value suggestion background image G140 is a dedicated background image for the set value effect, and includes a first normal background image G111, a second normal background image G112, a third normal background image G113, and a positive change background image G120. , And time-saving background image G130.

  The display of the setting value suggestion background image G140 is continued until a predetermined number of special figure variable displays are executed without winning a jackpot, or until a special jackpot is won before the predetermined number of special figure variable displays is executed. Be executed. That is, if a predetermined number of special figure variable displays are executed without winning a jackpot, or if a special jackpot is won before the predetermined number of special figure variable displays are executed, the process exits from the setting value suggestion zone. The predetermined number is set to 1 to 6 times. In the following, this predetermined number is referred to as “continuation number”.

  The number of continuations is determined by the continuation number determination for determining the number of continuations. The determination of the number of continuations is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 using a continuation number determination table. The continuation number determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the continuation number determination table is associated with the add-on number. That is, the continuation number determination table used in the continuation number determination differs depending on the number of add-ons. Further, the continuation count determination table associated with the number of addi- tions is also associated with the set value. That is, the continuation number determination table used in the continuation number determination also differs depending on the set value.

  As described above, the continuation number determination table is associated with the number of hooks and the set value. Then, the selection rate of each continuation number (1 to 6) is set by the combination of the number of add-ons and the set value.

  According to the continuation number determination table, when the number of add-ons is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected to be 1 is “set value“ 1 ”> set value“ 2 ”> set value“ 3 ”> set value“ 4 ”. > Set value “5”> set value “6”. That is, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of add-ons is 500, it is highly possible that the set value is the set value in this order.

  When the number of add-ons is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected to be 6 is set value “6”> set value “5”> set value “4”> set value “3”> set value “2”. >> set value "1". That is, if the special figure variable display is performed six times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of add-on times is 500, it is highly possible that the set value is the set value in this order.

  Furthermore, when the number of add-ons is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected to be 2 is the highest when the set value is “2”, and is the highest when the set value is “5” or the set value “6”. Low. That is, when the special figure variable display is performed twice in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of add-on times is 500, the possibility of the set value “2” is the highest, and the set value “5” or the set value “6” Least likely.

  Alternatively, when the number of add-ons is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected to be 4 is the highest when the set value is “4”, and is the highest when the set value is “1” or the set value “2”. Low. That is, when the special figure variable display is performed four times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addends is 500, the possibility of the set value “4” is the highest and the set value “1” or the set value “2” Least likely.

  Furthermore, when the number of add-ons is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected to be 5 is highest when the setting value is “5”, and is highest when the setting value is “1” or the setting value “2”. Low. That is, when the special figure variable display is performed five times in the setting value suggestion zone from the time of 500 additions, the possibility of the setting value “5” is the highest, and the setting value “1” or the setting value “2” Least likely.

  If the setting value is “6” when the number of add-ons is 500, the selectivity for the continuation number “1” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of add-on times is 500, there is no possibility that the set value is “6”. Similarly, when the number of add-ons is 500 and the set value is “1”, the selectivity for the number of continuations “6” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed six times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of add-on times is 500, there is no possibility that the set value is “1”.

  When the number of add-ons is 750 and the set value is “3” to the set value “6”, the selectivity for the continuation number “1” or “2” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed once or twice in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of add-ons is 750, there is no possibility that the set value is “3” to the set value “6”, and the set value “ This means that either "1" or the set value "2" has been set. However, when the number of continuations is one, the possibility that the setting value is “1” is higher. On the other hand, when the number of continuations is two, the possibility that the setting value is “2” is higher. .

  When the number of add-ons is 750 and the set value is “5” to the set value “6”, the selectivity for the continuation number “3” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed three times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of add-ons is 750, there is no possibility that the set value is “5” to the set value “6”, and the set value is “1” to “6”. This means that one of the setting values “4” has been set. However, in this case, the setting value “3” is the highest possibility, and the setting value “1” is the lowest possibility.

  When the number of add-ons is 750, the selectivity for the number of continuations “4” is higher than 0 regardless of the setting value “1” to the setting value “6”. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed four times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of add-ons is 750, any of the set values “1” to “6” may be set. become. However, in this case, the setting value “4” is the highest possibility, and the setting value “1” is the lowest possibility.

  Furthermore, when the setting value is “1” to the setting value “2” when the number of add-ons is 750, the selectivity for the continuation number “5” or “6” is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed 5 or 6 times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of add-ons is 750, there is no possibility that the set value is “1” to the set value “2”, and the set value “ This means that any one of “3” to “6” is set. However, when the number of times of continuation is 5, the possibility that the setting value is “5” is high, and the possibility that the setting value is “3” is the lowest. On the other hand, when the number of continuations is 6, the possibility that the setting value is “6” is high, and the possibility that the setting value is “3” is the lowest.

  As described above, when the number of add-ons is 500 and 750, there is a possibility that there are a plurality of set values for one continuous count, and the selection rate differs depending on the set value. Will be suggested. On the other hand, when the number of add-ons is 1000, only one set value is associated with one continuous number, and thus the set value is notified by the continuous number.

  Specifically, when the number of add-ons is 1000, if the set value “2” to the set value “6” are set, the selectivity for the continuation number “1” is 0%, and the set value “ If “1” is set, the selectivity for the continuation count “1” is 100%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of add-ons is 1000, there is no possibility that the set value is “2” to the set value “6”, and the set value is “1”. Is set. Similarly, when the number of add-ons is 1000, and when the number of continuations of the set value suggestion zone is 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, the set value “2” and the set value “3” The set value “4”, the set value “5”, and the set value “6” are set.

  As described above, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the continuation number determination based on the continuation number determination table, and performs the continuation number determination at the time of stop display of the special figure, that is, at the time of stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. be able to. When the number of continuations is determined by the determination of the number of continuations, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts the set value effect at the end of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the normal background images G111 to G113 displayed so far. To the setting value suggestion background image G140. Thereafter, the set value effect is continuously executed until the special figure variable display is executed the number of times without winning the jackpot. Then, when the special figure variable display of the continuation number ends, the set value effect ends, and the setting value suggestion background image G140 is switched to the normal background images G111 to G113 immediately before the set value effect is executed.

  Next, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), it is assumed that the special figure variation effect with the add-on number of 500 is being executed. At this time, the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display unit 50a. It is also assumed that the special figure change pattern of the 500th special figure change display is a loss change. Then, it is assumed that, in the special figure fluctuation effect in which the add-on number is 500 times, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed as shown in FIG.

  Here, when the continuation number is determined and the continuation number is determined, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 ends, and the next special figure variation effect is started. At this time, the set value effect starts and the first normal background image G111 is switched to the set value suggested background image G140.

  In addition, if the special figure reservation number is “0” when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the 500th add-on number is completed, the next special figure variable display and the special figure change effect are started. Instead, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is continuously executed, but in response to the lapse of the special figure fixed time from the start of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, that is, the special figure hold , The set value effect starts at the timing when the next special figure fluctuation effect is started, and switches from the first normal background image G111 to the set value suggestive background image G140.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (A) to FIG. 75 (C), the set value effect is executed until the special figure variable display of the set value effect continuation number is executed without winning the jackpot, and the set value effect is performed. When the stop symbols of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the continuation number are displayed, the set value effect ends, and as shown in FIG. The display is switched to one normal background image G111.

  74 to 75 exemplify the set value effect when the number of add-on reaches 500 times, but the set value effect is similarly executed when the number of add-on reaches 750 times and 1000 times.

  Next, in the seventh embodiment, an example of a set value effect process performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 to execute the set value effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 may perform the set value effect processing shown in FIGS. 76 to 77 after the special figure fluctuation stop processing of step S4308 when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation stop command is received in step S4307. it can.

  In the set value effect process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the normal effect mode is set in step S5401. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the normal effect mode has not been set, it ends the set value effect process, and if it determines that the normal effect mode has been set, proceeds to step S5402.

  In step S5402, the effect control microcomputer 121 adds “1” to the counter value of the add-on number counter that counts the add-on number. As described above, the counter value of the add-on number counter is incremented by "1" each time the special figure fluctuation display ends in the normal effect mode. The add-on number counter is provided in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. The add-on number counter is cleared with the execution of the jackpot game.

  Next, in step S5403, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not a set value effect remaining number described later is one or more. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the remaining number of set value effects is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S5416, and when it is determined that the remaining number of set value effects is not 1 or more, that is, 0, the process proceeds to step S5404.

  Next, in step S5404, effect control microcomputer 121 checks the number of add-on times counter and determines whether or not the number of add-on times is 500. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of add-ons is not 500, the process proceeds to step S5406. If it is determined that the number of add-ons is 500, the process proceeds to step S5405, and the number-of-continuations determination table for 500 add-ons Is selected and the process proceeds to step S5410.

  In step S5406, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the add-on number counter and determines whether or not the add-on number is 750. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of add-ons is not 750, the process proceeds to step S5408. If it determines that the number of add-ons is 750, the process proceeds to step S5407, and the continuation number determination table for the number of add-ons 750. Is selected and the process proceeds to step S5410.

  In step S5408, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the add-on number counter and determines whether or not the add-on number is 1000 times. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of add-ons is not 1000, it ends the set value effect process. If it determines that the number of add-ons is 1000, the process proceeds to step S5409, and the number of continuations for the number of add-on 1000 is performed. The determination table is selected, and the process proceeds to step S5410.

  In step S5410, the effect control microcomputer 121 further checks the set value flag from the continuation count determination table for the selected add-on times of 500, 750, or 1000 times, and associates the set value flag with the set value. Select the continuation count determination table.

  Next, in step S5411, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the continuation number determination random number as a continuation number determination random number, and selects the acquired continuation number determination random number in step S5412 in step S5412. The number of continuations is determined by collating with the continuation number determination table.

  In each of the continuation number determination tables, the value of the continuation number determination random number (continuation number determination value) is allocated to the continuation number so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 73 is obtained. The random number counter for determining the number of continuations is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed updating process in step S4003.

  In step S5413, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the number of continuations, which is the result of the determination of the number of continuations, in the set value effect remaining number counter, and in step S5414, stores the normal effect stage data indicating the current normal effect stage in the effect RAM 124. In step S5415, a set value effect start command indicating the effect of the set value effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the set value effect process ends.

  The counter value of the set value effect remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of special figure variable displays in which the set value effect can be executed. As will be described later, in the set value effect, “1” is subtracted each time the set value effect process is performed, as long as the set value effect remaining number counter is 1 or more. In the following, the remaining number of special figure fluctuation displays that can perform the set value effect is referred to as “set value effect remaining number”.

  Further, when the set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ1. When the special figure determination time has elapsed since the EZ3 was stopped, the current normal background images G111 to G113 are switched to the set value suggestion background image G140.

  Next, effect control microcomputer 121 subtracts “1” from the counter value of the set value effect remaining number counter in step S5416, and determines in step S5417 whether the set value effect remaining number is “0”. I do. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value effect remaining number is not “0”, it ends the set value effect process as it is, and if it determines that the set value effect remaining number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S5418. After confirming the effect stage data, the normal value stage before the execution of the set value effect is indicated, and a set value effect end command indicating the end of the set value effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the set value effect is set. Finish the process.

  When the set value effect end command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 sets the set value suggestion background image G140 Then, the display is switched to the normal background images G111 to G113 before the execution of the set value effect, and the set value effect is ended.

  As described above, in the seventh embodiment, a set value effect capable of suggesting or notifying a set value is executed based on the number of addi- tions. While the game is declining, it is possible to interest the game. Furthermore, as the number of add-ons increases, possible set values are narrowed down and the set values are easily estimated, so that the effect of the set value effects is improved.

(Modification of the seventh embodiment)
In the seventh embodiment, the setting value effect is executed by displaying the setting value suggestion background image G140 on the display unit 50a. However, as the effect mode of the setting value effect, the image type is set to the setting value suggestion background image G140. The present invention is not limited to this and may be set appropriately. In addition, as an effect mode of the set value effect, the set value effect may be executed using another effect device such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the panel movable device 55 instead of or in addition to the image. .

  In the seventh embodiment, the set value is suggested or reported based on the number of times the set value effect is continued. However, the elements that can be suggested or reported are not limited to the number of times continued and may be set as appropriate. For example, a plurality of types of images related to the setting value effect may be set, and the setting value may be suggested or reported according to the type of an image that appears when the number of add-ons is a predetermined number.

  Further, the number of addi- tions in which the set value effect is executed, the number of continuations of the set value effect, the selectivity of the number of continuations for each set value, and the like may be appropriately set.

  In the seventh embodiment, the determination of the number of continuations is performed at the start of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the set value effect starts when the special figure fixed time has elapsed after the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 have stopped. However, the execution timing of the determination of the number of continuations and the start timing of the set value effect may be appropriately set. For example, after the determination of the number of continuations is performed, the set value effect may be started when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in a fluctuating manner, and the vehicle may enter the set value suggestion zone. Alternatively, the set value effect may be started in the middle of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, such as when a reach is established, and the user may enter the set value suggestion zone.

  Further, in the seventh embodiment, the special figure variation display related to the number of add-ons for executing the set value production is counted only in the special figure variation display in the normal production mode, but in the positive variation production mode and the time saving production mode. The special figure fluctuation display at that time may also be counted.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the eighth embodiment, when the set value most advantageous to the player is set, that is, when the set value with the highest jackpot probability is set, the set value is set in the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds. May be executed to indicate that the is set. In the eighth embodiment, differences from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configuration as the basic embodiment or the configuration corresponding to the same in the same manner.

  As described in the basic embodiment, various types of jackpot symbols are provided in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, six types of jackpot symbols, a jackpot symbol D to a jackpot symbol I, are provided as jackpot symbols according to the special figure 2.

  And as shown in FIG. 79, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol D is 10, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol E is 10, and the round of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F is The number is 8 times, the number of rounds of the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol G is 6 times, the number of rounds of the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol H is 4 times, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol I is Six times.

  In the following, the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol D is “fourth jackpot game”, the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol E is “fifth jackpot game”, the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F is “sixth jackpot game”, The jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol G is “7th jackpot game”, the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol H is “8th jackpot game”, and the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol I is “9th jackpot game”.

  The opening time of the special winning opening 14 in the round game from the fourth big hit game to the ninth big hit game is set to 29.5 seconds, and the closing time is set to 2.0 seconds. As shown in FIG. 80, the gaming state set after the fourth jackpot game to the eighth jackpot game is a high-probability high-base gaming state, and the high-probability prescribed number of times is 160 times, and the time-saving prescribed number of times is 160 times. Is set. On the other hand, the game state set after the ninth big hit game is a low-probability high-base game state, and the prescribed number of time savings is set to 100 times.

  Then, in the fourth jackpot game, it is suggested that the number of rounds is 10, and a jackpot game effect dedicated to the fifth jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, in the fifth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game, a jackpot game effect called a so-called “rank-up bonus” is executed. In the rank-up bonus, for example, the number of round games, in other words, the maximum number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is not known before the start of the jackpot game, and during the jackpot game, the round game is further continued. By performing an effect as to whether or not the number of prize balls increases (increases), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  The number of rounds from the fifth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game is 4, 6, 8, 10 times, and at the end of the 4 rounds, an effect is performed as to whether the round game will continue after the 4th round. Is In the case of the fifth jackpot game to the seventh jackpot game and the ninth jackpot game, at the end of the six rounds, an effect is performed as to whether or not the round game will be continued after the sixth round. In the case of the fifth jackpot game to the sixth round game, at the end of the eight rounds, an effect is performed as to whether or not the round game will continue after the eighth round.

  For example, when the round game from the fifth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), an image in which the singer who likes the hero character sings song A as the round background image G201 on the display unit 50a. Is displayed, and the music A is played from the speaker 52. When the four rounds are completed, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the singer finishes singing the song A and soaks in the finish. The scene immersed in the lingering sound constitutes an effect of whether or not the round game is continued.

  If it is the eighth jackpot game, the round game ends here, so as shown in FIG. 81 (C), after a short interval, the ending is entered, and as shown in FIG. 81 (D). Then, after the singer bows and suggests that the round game has ended, the ending image G5 and the total prize ball count image G6 are displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (E). On the other hand, in the case of the fifth jackpot game to the seventh jackpot game and the ninth jackpot game, the round game continues, so after a short time, the round 5 starts and as shown in FIG. Then, the singer starts singing another song B.

  Also, in the 5th to 6th rounds, as in the case of the 1st to 4th rounds, a video in which the singer sings the song B flows, and when the 6th round ends, as shown in FIG. Finishes singing song B and soaks in the afterglow. Then, in the case of the seventh jackpot game and the ninth jackpot game, since the round game ends here, as in the case of the eighth jackpot game, after a short interval, as shown in FIG. 82 (C). Then, the ending is performed. On the other hand, in the case of the fifth jackpot game to the sixth jackpot game, the round game continues, so after a short time, the round 7 is started, and as shown in FIG. Start singing another song C.

  Further, in the same manner from the 7th round to the 8th round, a video in which the singer sings the song C flows, and when the 8th round is completed, as shown in FIG. Soak. Then, in the case of the sixth jackpot game, the round game ends here, so that, as in the case of the eighth jackpot game, after a short interval, the ending is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (B). Is On the other hand, in the case of the fifth jackpot game, since the round game continues, the round 9 is started after a short interval, and the singer plays another song D as shown in FIG. 83 (C). Start singing. Thereafter, at the end of the tenth round, the singer finishes singing the song D, soaks in the lingering sound, and after a short interval, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), in the same manner as in the case of the eighth jackpot game, etc. Ending is performed.

  As described above, in the fifth jackpot game to the ninth jackpot game, the singer may bow after a while after singing the song and soak in the lingering sound, or may start singing the song again. Here, a scene in which the singer finishes singing the song and soaks in the reverberation for a short time constitutes a continuous branching effect as to whether or not the round game is continued. The bowing scene constitutes a continuation failure effect indicating that the round game does not continue. On the other hand, a scene in which singing is started again constitutes a continuation success effect indicating that the round game is continued.

  Note that during the period between when the singer finishes singing the song and when he bows, and between when the singer finishes singing the song and when he starts singing another song, Specifically, it is a period of closing after opening of the special winning opening 14 in round 4, round 6, round 8, and round 10. The time of this period is longer than the closing time after the opening of the special winning opening 14 in the first to third, fifth, seventh, and nine rounds.

  Next, a blessing effect performed in one round of the fifth jackpot game will be described. The blessing effect is an effect indicating that the number of rounds is the largest in the rank-up bonus. There are three types of blessing productions. The first is a normal blessing effect that can be executed with any setting value. The second is a high setting value suggestion blessing effect that can be executed when the setting value is 4 to 6, and suggests that the setting value is relatively high. The third is a maximum setting value suggestion blessing effect that can be executed when the setting value is 6, and suggests the highest setting value.

  Here, specific examples of the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, and the maximum setting value suggesting blessing effect will be described. First, the normal blessing production will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), in one round, a singer who likes the main character appears and starts singing song A.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the first effect button operation validity period as described in the basic embodiment is generated, and the first effect button operation with the first effect button operation promotion image G12 is performed. A promotion effect is performed. When the first effect button 40k is operated during the first effect button operation effective period, any blessing effect may be executed.

  The normal blessing effect is, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), composed of a movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment. Specifically, the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position in a front view, the rotating member 55k1 is rotated, and the normal effect image G13 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a.

  The high setting value suggestion blessing effect also has a configuration including a movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment, but further includes another effect. Specifically, the movable body 55k of FIG. 84 (D) moves down to the operating position in a front view, and the rotating member 55k1 rotates. Furthermore, in addition to the normal effect image G13 being displayed on the entire display unit 50a, a specific sound effect (for example, “Kew In Kwin”) is output from the speaker 52 in a different system from the music A. This is different from the normal blessing effect in that a specific sound effect (for example, “Kyuin Kyuin”) is output from the speaker 52.

  Further, the maximum setting value suggestion blessing effect also has a configuration including a movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment, but further includes another effect. Specifically, the board movable body 55k descends to the operating position in a front view, and the rotating member 55k1 rotates. Further, a special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and a specific sound effect (for example, “Kyuin Kyuin”) is output from the speaker 52 in a different system from the music A. This is different from the normal blessing effect in that a specific sound effect (for example, “Cuin Quin”) is output from the speaker 52 and the special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Further, the special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, which is different from the high setting value suggested blessing effect.

  When the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, and the maximum setting value suggesting blessing effect are not executed, even if the first effect button 40k is operated during the first effect button operation effective period, the first effect button operation is performed. The background image G201 for the round is displayed as it is only by the disappearance of the promotion image G12.

  The normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, and the maximum setting value suggesting blessing effect are performed for 5 seconds. When these effects are completed, the board movable body 55k returns to the standby state, the specific sound effect disappears, and the singer returns from the normal effect image G13 or the special effect image G16 to the round background image G201 in which the singer sings the song A.

  As described above, the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, and the maximum setting value suggesting blessing effect may be performed. Whether or not to execute the blessing effect, and which blessing effect is to be performed. Is determined by a blessing effect determination for determining whether or not a blessing effect can be executed and a type of the blessing effect to be executed. The blessing effect determination is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 using a blessing effect determination table. The blessing effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (A), FIG. 85 (B), FIG. 86 (A), and FIG. 86 (B), the blessing effect determination table is associated with the set value. That is, the blessing effect determination table used in the blessing effect determination differs depending on the set value. Further, the blessing effect determination table associated with the set value is associated with the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan. That is, the blessing effect determination table used in the blessing effect determination differs depending on the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan.

  As described above, the blessing effect determination table is associated with the set value and the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the consecutive chan. Then, the combination of the set value and the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan sets the type of blessing effect to be executed and the selectivity of non-execution of the blessing effect.

  For example, if the setting value is “6”, execution of the normal blessing effect, execution of the high setting value suggesting blessing effect, execution of the maximum setting value suggesting reduction effect, and non-execution of the blessing effect can be selected. When the set value is “4” and the set value is “5”, execution of the normal blessing effect, execution of the high setting value suggested blessing effect, and non-execution of the blessing effect can be selected. Furthermore, if the setting value is “1” to the setting value “3”, execution of the normal blessing effect and non-execution of the blessing effect can be selected.

  Then, in the case of the set value “4” to the set value “6”, as the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan increases, the selectivity for the execution of the high set value effect increases. Furthermore, in the case of the setting value “6”, the selection rate for the execution of the maximum setting value effect increases as the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the consecutive chan increases. Also, for the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the same consecutive chan, the selection rate for the execution of the high set value effect increases as the set value increases.

  Next, an example of a blessing effect process performed by the effect controlling microcomputer 121 to execute a blessing effect in the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. For example, in the 10-ms timer interrupt process of step S4012, the effect control microcomputer 121 can perform the blessing effect process shown in FIG. 87 after step S4203.

  In the blessing effect process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines, in step S5501, whether or not one round of the fifth big hit game is being executed. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that one round of the fifth big hit game has not been executed, it ends the blessing effect process, and if it determines that one round of the fifth big hit game has been executed, the process proceeds to step S5502.

  In step S5502, the effect control microcomputer 121 is currently in the first effect button operation effective period, and determines whether or not the first effect button 40k is operated in the first effect button operation effective period. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the first effect button operation is not in effect or the first effect button operation is effective but the first effect button 40k is not operated, the blessing effect process ends. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the first effect button operation has been performed during the first effect button operation effective period, the process proceeds to step S5503.

  In step S5503, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a blessing effect determination table associated therewith based on the set value indicated by the set value flag and the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan.

  Although not shown, the effect control microcomputer 121 is provided in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 in the opening effect start process when, for example, receiving an opening command indicating the big hit symbol E relating to the fifth big hit game. "1" is added to the fifth jackpot game execution number counter. Thereby, the effect control microcomputer 121 can count the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the consecutive chan. Also, the fifth jackpot game execution number counter is cleared when the high probability high base game state or the low probability high base game state shifts to the low probability low base game state without going through the big hit.

  Next, in step S5504, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the blessing effect determination random number counter as a blessing effect determination random number. In step S5505, the acquired blessing effect determination random number is determined by the selected blessing effect random number. The blessing effect judgment is made by collating with the judgment table.

  Each blessing effect determination table stores the value of the random number for the blessing effect determination (blessing effect) so that various blessing effects are performed or the blessing effect is not performed so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIGS. (Judgment value) is distributed. Further, the blessing effect determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed updating process in step S4003.

  In step S5506, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the result of the blessing effect determination is execution of any blessing effect. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the blessing effect is not to be executed, it ends the blessing effect as it is, and if it determines that any blessing effect is to be executed, in step S5507, the blessing effect indicating the type of the blessing effect and the effect content. The start command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the blessing effect process ends. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5503 once in the fifth jackpot game, and thereafter does not perform the blessing effect process.

  As described above, in the eighth embodiment, in the jackpot game in which the number of rounds is the largest, the high setting value indicating that the setting value is relatively high using the blessing effect indicating that the number of rounds is the largest. Since the suggested blessing effect and the highest setting value suggesting blessing effect indicating that the setting value is the highest are executed, the entertainment interest of the game is improved, and the player's willingness to play can be increased. Further, as the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game in the consecutive chan increases, the high set value effect and the maximum set value effect are more easily executed, so that the player's willingness to play can be further increased.

(Modification of the eighth embodiment)
The specific effect content of the set value effect is not limited to the eighth embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. The high setting value effect and the maximum setting value effect were performed using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the panel movable device 55, but instead of the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the panel movable device 55. Alternatively, in addition to the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the panel movable device 55, another effect device such as a frame lamp 53 may be used to execute the high set value effect and the maximum set value effect. Further, the type of effect device used may be changed between the high setting value effect and the highest setting value effect.

  In the eighth embodiment, the blessing effect determination is performed based on the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the consecutive big hits. The blessing effect determination may be performed based on the determination. Further, the blessing effect determination may be performed based on the number of executions of the jackpot game in which the number of round games executed is not limited to the number of executions of the round game.

  Further, only one of the high set value effect and the maximum set value effect may be made executable. The high set value effect can be executed with the set value “4” to the set value “6”, but may be set with the set value “5” to the set value “6”. Further, in the case of the set value “1” to the set value “3” or the set value “1” to the set value “2”, a low set value effect indicating that the set value is relatively low may be executed. You may be able to.

  Further, the execution timing of the blessing effect may be appropriately set without being limited to the eighth embodiment. For example, a blessing effect may be executed during a round game after the second round. Furthermore, a blessing effect may be performed at the opening. In addition, in the special figure fluctuation effect, a blessing effect may be executed before the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and after the notification of the big hit is made. Further, the execution timing of the blessing effect is not limited to one, and a plurality of timings may be set. The blessing effect pattern is not limited to one, and a plurality of patterns may be set.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the ninth embodiment, a set value effect indicating a set value is executed using the display mode at the start of the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on. In the ninth embodiment, points different from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configuration as the basic embodiment or the configuration corresponding to the same in the same manner.

  First, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the power is turned on, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of a predetermined combination set in advance are displayed on the display unit 50a in a stopped state. For example, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), it is assumed that the combination of “left effect symbol EZ1, middle effect symbol EZ2, right effect symbol EZ3” is “3, 2, 4”. Then, in this state, when the first special figure fluctuation display after the power is turned on is started, the fluctuation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started accordingly.

  Here, the display mode at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can be appropriately set. For example, as a normal display mode in which the set value effect is not performed, FIGS. 88 (B) to 88 ( As shown in C), each of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the stopped state can move downward as it is. Hereinafter, the display mode at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is referred to as a “normal start mode”.

  The order in which the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start to change can be set as appropriate. For example, three effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can start to fluctuate simultaneously. Further, it is also possible to start to fluctuate in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3 → the middle effect symbol EZ2.

  In the ninth embodiment, when the set value is the same as the set value that was set when the power supply voltage was previously turned on to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the first effect after the power was turned on is set. In the variable display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the variable symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start the variable display in the normal start mode. Therefore, the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the normal start mode means that the set value changes in the same manner as the set value that was set when the power supply voltage was previously turned on to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Suggests not. In the following, the set value that was set when the power supply voltage was applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 last time is referred to as “previous set value”.

  On the other hand, if the set value is different from the previous set value, that is, if the set value has been changed since the last time the power supply voltage was turned on to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the first fluctuation display after the power was turned on. 89, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are different from the normal start mode as shown in FIGS. 89 (B) to 89 (C) from the first stop state after the power is turned on as shown in FIG. 89 (A). The variable display is started in the first special start mode. Specifically, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have stopped move downward after repeating a small reciprocating movement in the left and right direction at the start of the first variable display after the power is turned on. The small reciprocating movement in the left-right direction at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 constitutes a “first special start mode” at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. The fact that the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts in the first special start mode suggests that the set value has changed from the previous time.

  When the set value is higher than the previous set value, in the first variation display after the power is turned on, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are switched to the first stop after the power is turned on as shown in FIG. From the state, as shown in FIGS. 90 (B) to 90 (C), the variable display is started in a second special start mode different from the normal start mode and the first special start mode. More specifically, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have stopped move downward after repeating small reciprocating movements in the left-right direction and the up-down direction at the start of the first variable display after the power is turned on. The small reciprocating movement in the left-right direction at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 constitutes a “second special start mode” at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Accordingly, the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode indicates that the set value is higher than the previous set value and has changed from the previous time.

  The order in which the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 move downward when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 perform variable display in the first special start mode or the second special start mode can also be set as appropriate.

  As described above, the display mode at the start of the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on is set based on the current set value and the previous set value, so that the player can The relationship between the current set value and the previous set value can be roughly grasped.

  Although the details will be described later, when the set value is higher than the previous set value, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start changing display in the second special start mode, and change display in the second special start mode. There is a time when starting in the first special start mode without starting. The probability that the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start changing display in the second special start mode increases as the current set value increases.

  In the following, the normal start mode, the first special start mode, and the second special start mode will be collectively referred to as “effect symbol change start mode”. In addition, starting the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special start mode is referred to as “first set value effect”. Starting the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode is referred to as “second set value effect”. The first set value effect and the second set value effect are collectively referred to as “set value effect”.

  In the ninth embodiment, the first set value effect and the second set value effect are not executed using the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 smaller than the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Therefore, the fluctuation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is started in the same manner regardless of whether the set value is the same as the previous set value.

  Next, an example of a process for determining whether to execute the set value effect will be described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, this processing is referred to as set value effect determination processing. As the set value effect determination processing, for example, the processing shown in FIG. 91 is performed. In the special figure fluctuation effect start processing of step S4306, the effect control microcomputer 121 transmits a special figure fluctuation effect pattern command representing a special figure fluctuation effect pattern to the effect RAM 124. Can be performed after setting in a predetermined area.

  In addition, as a premise of the set value effect determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 previously supplied the power supply voltage to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 based on the backup data in addition to the set value designation command in the game control main process. It is assumed that a previous set value designation command indicating the set value set at that time is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Upon receiving the previous setting value designation command, the effect control microcomputer 121 stores the previous setting value data indicating the setting value indicated by the previous setting value designation command in the previous setting value data area provided in the effect RAM 124. Shall be memorized.

  In the set value effect determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5601 whether or not the special figure change effect to be started is the first special figure change effect after the power is turned on. It is determined whether the special figure variation effect execution completed flag is ON.

  When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure variation effect is not the first special figure variation effect after the power is turned on, that is, the special figure variation effect execution completed flag is ON, the special value variation effect determination process is completed and the special figure variation effect starts. Return to processing. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that this is the first special figure variation effect after turning on the power, that is, the special figure variation effect execution completed flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S5602.

  In step S5602, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a special figure variation effect completed flag indicating that the first special figure variation effect has been executed after power-on, in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and proceeds to step S5603.

  In step S5603, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag and the previous set value data, and determines whether the current set value is the same as the previous set value. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the current set value is the same as the previous set value, the effect control microcomputer 121 ends the set value effect determination process and returns to the special figure variation effect start process. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the current set value is not the same as the previous set value, the process proceeds to step S5604.

  Next, in step S5604, the effect control microcomputer 121 checks the set value flag and the previous set value data to determine whether the current set value is higher than the previous set value. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the current set value is not higher than the previous set value, the process proceeds to step S5610, while if it is determined that the current set value is higher than the previous set value, the process proceeds to step S5605.

  In step S5605, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the second set value effect determination table. The second set value effect determination table is a data table used when performing the second set value effect determination for determining whether to execute the second set value effect. As shown in FIG. 92, the second set value effect determination table is associated with the set values. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 refers to the set value flag stored in the effect RAM 124 and selects the second set value effect determination table associated with the set value.

  In each second set value effect determination table, the value of the second set value effect determination random number (the second set value Effect determination value). As shown in FIG. 92, as the set value increases, the probability that it is determined to execute the second set value effect increases. The second setting value effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123. Also, when the set value is “1”, it is unlikely that the set value is higher than the previous set value, so the selectivity for the execution of the second set value effect is 0%.

  Next, in step S5606, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the second set value effect determination random number counter as the second set value effect determination random number, and in step S5607, acquires the acquired second set value effect. The second set value effect determination is performed by comparing the determination random number with the second set value effect determination table selected in step S5605. The second set value effect determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated in the random number seed update process in step S4003.

  Subsequently, in step S5608, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether to execute the second set value effect as a result of the second set value effect determination. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the second set value effect is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step S5610, whereas if it is determined that the second set value effect is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S5609.

  In step S5609, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a second set value effect start command indicating the effect contents of the second set value effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and completes the set value effect determination processing. The process returns to the variable effect start processing. On the other hand, in step S5610, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the first set value effect start command indicating the effect contents of the first set value effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and ends the set value effect determination process. The process returns to the special figure fluctuation effect start process.

  When the second setting value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission processing (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 The second set value effect is executed at the start of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Specifically, the image CPU 141 starts the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode.

  Further, when the first set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 turns on the power. A first set value effect is executed at the start of the subsequent display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Specifically, the image CPU 141 starts the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special start mode.

  If the set value is the same as the previous set value, the first set value effect command or the second set value effect command is not transmitted to the image control board 140. Therefore, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on in the normal start mode.

  As described above, the set value effect may be executed, so that the player can recognize the state of the current set value with respect to the previous set value. That is, it can be inferred whether or not the set value has been changed since the last time the power supply voltage was applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Basically, the power supply voltage of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is cut off at the end of the business of the gaming shop, and the power supply voltage of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on before the business start of the next day. Therefore, the setting value of the previous day and the setting value of the day can be compared depending on whether or not the setting value effect is executed. Then, since the information on the set value can be obtained depending on whether or not the set value effect is executed, the player is noticed at the start of the variation display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ1 are displayed. The effect of effecting the variable display of EZ3 can be improved.

  Further, the set value effect has two types of set value effects, a first set value effect and a second set value effect, each having a different function, and suggesting different information on the set value. The user can pay attention to the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on, so that the effect of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can be improved.

(Modification of the ninth embodiment)
The production mode of the first set value production and the second set value production, that is, the first special start mode and the second special start mode are not limited to the ninth embodiment, but may be set appropriately. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be variably displayed in a mode different from the first special start mode and the second special start mode. In addition, not at the start of the fluctuation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, a set value effect of providing information about the set value by using the display mode of the fluctuation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 when a reach is established or stopped. May be executed.

  Further, the set value effect may be performed by changing the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 other than the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on. For example, after supplying the power supply voltage to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, for example, the set value effect may be executed using the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 for a predetermined number of times such as the first 10 times after the power is turned on. The number of times may be one or more. In addition, after turning on the power supply voltage to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, a set value effect may be executed using the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a predetermined period after a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Further, the set value effect may be executed based on the amount of change of the set value from the previous day's set value. For example, when the first set value effect is performed, as the change amount increases from the previous day's set value, the movement amount in the left-right direction is increased, the movement speed is increased, or the number of movements is increased. To perform the first set value effect. When the second set value effect is executed, as the change amount from the previous day's set value increases, at least one of the movement width in the left-right direction and the up-down direction is increased, the movement speed is increased, or the number of movements is reduced. For example, the second set value effect may be executed in association with the amount of change, such as increasing.

  In the ninth embodiment, the set value effect is executed using the image display device 50. However, in addition to the image display device 50 or in place of the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and The set value effect may be executed using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the panel movable device 55. An effect device other than the image display device 50 may be used for either the first set value effect or the second set value effect, or only one of them. Furthermore, when both the first set value effect and the second set value effect are performed using an effect device other than the image display device 50, the effect mode of the effect device other than the image display device 50 is the first set value effect. And the second set value effect may be the same or different.

  Further, in the ninth embodiment, the first set value effect and the second set value effect are executed using the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but are executed using the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 instead. May be. Alternatively, the first set value effect and the second set value effect may be executed using the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. Furthermore, one of the first set value effect and the second set value effect is executed using one of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 Any one of the first set value effect and the second set value effect may be executed using one of the other KZ3.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the tenth embodiment, a small hit that is not provided in the basic embodiment is provided. The small hit is one of the determination results of the big hit determination. That is, in the jackpot determination, one of the jackpot, the small hit, and the loss is selected. As a result, the probability of loss differs depending on the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency of occurrence of the loss. In addition, the same code | symbol and a term are used about the structure same as a basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  First, the jackpot determination table used in the jackpot determination will be described. The big hit determination table of the tenth embodiment is different from the big hit determination table shown in the basic embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) to 93 (C) and FIGS. 94 (A) to 94 (C), the big hit determination table of the tenth embodiment is associated with set values.

  Furthermore, the jackpot determination table associated with the set value is also associated with the type of the starting port where the winning due to the jackpot determination is performed, that is, the type of the special figure to be variably displayed based on the jackpot determination. ing. In the following, the jackpot determination table associated with Toku-zu 1 is referred to as a “first jackpot determination table”, and the jackpot determination table associated with Toku-zu 2 is referred to as a “second jackpot determination table”.

  Further, the first big hit determination table and the second big hit determination table are also associated with the gaming state. That is, each of the first jackpot determination tables includes a first jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state and a first jackpot determination table used in the high probability state. On the other hand, each of the second jackpot determination tables includes a second jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state and a second jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

  In each of the jackpot determination tables, a special symbol random number determination value is appropriately assigned to the jackpot, the small hit, and the loss as the jackpot determination result. The details of the selection rates of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss in the big hit determination table will be described later.

  The game state set after the big hit game in the tenth embodiment is also different from the case of the basic embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, the gaming state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol A is a high-probability-high-base gaming state, in which the high-probability prescribed count is 160 times and the time-saving prescribed number is 160 times. Set to times. The gaming state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol B is a high-probability low-base gaming state, and the high-probability prescribed count at this time is 160 times. On the other hand, the gaming state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol C is a low-probability low-base gaming state. That is, when the big hit symbol C is won, the gaming state other than the big hit game is executed, which is advantageous to the player.

  The gaming state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol D and the jackpot symbol E is a high-probability-high-base gaming state, in which the high-probability prescribed number of times and the time-saving prescribed number of times are set to 160 times. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F is a low-probability high base gaming state, and the prescribed number of times of saving at this time is 100 times.

  Further, the effect mode set after the big hit game in the tenth embodiment is partially different from that in the basic embodiment. The point slightly different from the case of the basic embodiment is that, after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol C, the high probability low base gaming state or the low probability low base gaming state is set. , A high-probability low-base game state or a low-probability low-base game state is set, so that it is difficult to determine which one is set.

  Latency mode is the longest, high-probability, low-base game state is set, without winning a jackpot, until the special figure variable display of the specified number of high-probability for the jackpot symbol B is executed, or the low-probability, low-base After the game state is set, the game is continued until the special figure variable display of the specified number of high probabilities related to the big hit symbol B is executed without winning the big hit.

  Also, the special figure variation pattern determination table is different from that in the basic embodiment due to the provision of the small hits. The special figure variation pattern relating to the small hit can be set as appropriate. For example, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 97, in the case of the small hit, the same special figure variation pattern as in the case of the loss can be selected. When the small hit is won, the reach determination is performed as in the case of the loss, and the special figure variation pattern determination table is distinguished depending on the presence or absence of the reach.

  More specifically, as the special figure change pattern determination table for the small hit, the special figure 1 change pattern determination table for the small hit with reach in the non-time saving state, and the special figure 1 for the small hit without reach in the non-time saving state Fluctuation pattern judgment table, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits related to time-saving game state, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits with reach for non-time-saving state, small hit without reach for non-time-saving state There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for special hits related to the time saving game state.

  Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern for small hit with no reach used in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for small hit with reach in the non-time saving state is used when the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is 0 to 2. There is a pattern determination table and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for small hit without reach used when the number of special figure 1 reservations (U1) is 3 to 4. Similarly, the special figure 2 for the small hit with no reach, which is used when the number of special figure 2 reservations (U2) is 0 to 2, is also included in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the small hit with reach in the non-time saving state. There is a fluctuation pattern determination table and a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for small hit without reach used when the number of special figure 2 reservations (U2) is 3 to 4.

  If a small hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in the non-time saving state and it is determined that there is a reach, the SP loss fluctuation, the L loss fluctuation, and the N loss fluctuation and the special figure fluctuation time and the effect flow are the same. One of the hit variation, the L small hit variation, and the N small hit variation is selected.

  In addition, when the small hit is won in the special drawing 1 lottery in the non-time reduction state and it is determined that there is no reach, the normal A loss fluctuation, the normal B loss fluctuation, and the normal C loss fluctuation and the special figure fluctuation time, and the production flow , The normal small hit variation, the normal small hit variation, and the normal small hit variation are selected.

  In addition, when the small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state, the shortened B small hit fluctuation with the same shortened B loss fluctuation, the special figure fluctuation time, and the effect flow is selected regardless of the presence or absence of the reach. This is because, as described later, the small hit probability in the special drawing 2 lottery is very low as compared with the loss.

  Then, when the small hit is won, the special figure stop display of the special figure indicating the small hit is finally performed on the special figure variable display. When the fixed time starts after the special figure is stopped in the mode indicating the small hit, the small hit game is performed. In addition, the special figure stopped in the mode showing the small hit is the small hit symbol, and its role corresponds to the big hit symbol and the loss symbol. Next, the small hit game will be described. In the tenth embodiment, only one small hit symbol is provided, but a plurality of small hit symbols may be set.

  The small hit game includes an open game with opening and closing of the special winning opening 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the small hit game to the start of the first open game, and a final open game. Ending from the end to the end of the small hit game (also referred to as ED) is included. Each open game starts when the opening game ends or when the previous open game ends, and ends when the next open game starts or the ending starts. It should be noted that OP and ED may not be provided.

  And the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the tenth embodiment controls the small hitting game using the small hitting game control table. In the tenth embodiment, only one type of small hit game is provided, but a plurality of types may be set in association with a plurality of types of small hit symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 98, elements (small hitting game components) constituting the small hitting game are stored in the small hitting game control table. The small hitting game components include the number of open games, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the special winning opening in which each open game is performed, the time to close until the next opening (closing time), the time of opening (opening time) ), And the ending time (ending time). When there are a plurality of types of small hit games, it is possible to set a small hit game component for each type of the small hit games.

  In the small hitting game of the tenth embodiment shown in FIG. 98, the opening game is performed twice. Then, in each open game, the special winning opening 14 is opened for 0.2 seconds. Note that the closing time of the special winning opening 14 between each open game is 2.0 seconds. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small hitting game to the start of the first opening game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 0.5 seconds from the end of the last open game to the end of the small hit game.

  Next, a difference between the basic embodiment and the processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 due to the provision of the small hits will be described. The processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 in the tenth embodiment mainly includes special operation processing, special figure 1 determination processing, special figure 1 variation pattern determination processing, special figure 2 determination processing, and special figure 2 variation pattern determination processing. And the special symbol determination processing is different from the basic embodiment. First, the special operation processing will be described.

  The special operation process includes a small hit game control process. The small hitting game control process is associated with the special operation status “6”, and is performed as step S1507 when the special operation status “6” is set. The “special operation status” is set to “1” by default. The process of setting the special operation status to “6” will be described later.

  The game control microcomputer 101 performs the small hit game control process, thereby performing the small hit game according to the above-described small hit game control table. In addition, in the small hitting game control processing, when all the open games are completed and the ending is started in the small hitting game, the microcomputer 101 indicates the ending according to the small hitting pattern related to the small hitting game. The ending command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. In the small hitting game control process, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to “1” when the small hitting game ends.

  Next, the special figure 1 determination processing will be described. In the special figure 1 determination process, the special symbol random number stored first in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a is read out, and the special symbol random number is stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current setting value and the game state. Based on this, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss.

  As described above, since the big hit determination table is associated with the set value, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the first big hit determination table associated with the set current set value. Further, since the first jackpot determination table is also associated with the game state, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the first jackpot determination associated with the normal probability state in the first jackpot determination table associated with the set value. A table or a first jackpot determination table associated with the high probability state is selected. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot determination for collating the special symbol random number with the selected first jackpot determination table.

  Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 101 further reads a jackpot symbol random number and performs a jackpot symbol type determination (jackpot symbol type determination) based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table. . Then, the big hit symbol data indicating the big hit symbol type is set in a special figure buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104, and the symbol designation command indicating the big hit symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104.

  If the result of the jackpot determination is "losing", the loss design data representing the loss is set in the special figure buffer, and the design specification command representing the loss is set in the output buffer. Alternatively, if the result of the big hit determination is "small hit", the small hit symbol data representing the small hit is set in the special figure buffer, and the symbol designation command indicating the small hit is set in the output buffer.

  Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 shows the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process in the tenth embodiment. Steps S1651 to S1654, S1658 to S1661, and S1664 to S1667 of FIG. 100 are the same as steps S1651 to S1654, S1655 to S1658, and S1659 to S1662 of the basic embodiment. is there. Hereinafter, differences of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process of the tenth embodiment from the basic embodiment will be described.

  In the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process of the tenth embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the big hit determination result is not “big hit” in step S1654 (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and the big hit determination result Is "small hit". If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the big hit determination result is not “small hit” in step S1655 (NO in S1655), the flow proceeds to step S1658, and the reach determination regarding the loss is performed.

  On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the big hit determination result is “small hit” in step S1655 (YES in S1655), the process proceeds to step S1656, and the small hit is determined as in the case of the reach determination regarding the loss. The reach determination is performed. The same reach determination table is used for the reach determination for the small hit and the reach determination for the loss.

  Subsequently, in step S1657, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the reach determination result is "there is a reach". If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reach determination result is not “reach present” (NO in S1657), the process proceeds to step S1662 to select the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the small hit without reach, and then proceeds to step S1662. Proceed to S1665. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reach determination result is “reach present” (YES in S1657), the process proceeds to step S1663 to select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for the small hit with reach reach. Then, the process proceeds to step S1665.

  After proceeding to step S1665, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the same processing as in the basic embodiment.

  The special figure 2 determination process is basically performed except that the table used in the big hit determination is the second big hit determination table and that the table used in the big hit symbol type determination is the second big hit symbol type determination table. Is a process similar to the special figure 1 determination process, and the description is omitted. Also, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination processing is basically the same as the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination processing except that the table used for the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination is the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 shows a special symbol determination process in the tenth embodiment. Steps S1751 to S1761 and S1765 of FIG. 100 are the same as S1751 to S1761 and S1762 of the basic embodiment. Hereinafter, points different from the basic embodiment of the special symbol determination process of the tenth embodiment will be described.

  In the special symbol determination process of the tenth embodiment, if the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1758 that the big hit symbol has stopped (NO in S1758), the process proceeds to step S1762, and determines whether the small hit symbol has stopped. Is determined. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the small hit symbol has not stopped in step S1762 (NO in S1762), the process proceeds to step S1765, changes the special operation status to "1", and ends the special symbol determination process. .

  On the other hand, when determining that the small hit symbol has stopped in step S1762 (YES in S1762), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1763 to perform a small hit game preparation process, and sets the special operation status to “6” in step S1764. And the special symbol determination process is completed.

  The game control microcomputer 101 sets a small hit game control table in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the small hit game preparation processing. Also, a small hit opening flag indicating that the small hit game is being opened is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the small hit game opening time (the first open game is started after the small hit game is started). To the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating a small hit opening is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

  Next, the selection rates of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss in the big hit determination table will be described. As described above, in the jackpot determination table, special symbol determination values are appropriately assigned to the jackpot, small hit, and loss that are the jackpot determination results. As a result, the selection rates of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss in each of the big hit determination tables are as shown in FIG. In the following, the jackpot selection rate is referred to as “big hit probability”, the small hit selection rate is referred to as “small hit probability”, and the loss selectivity is referred to as “loss probability”.

  As shown in FIG. 102, the jackpot probability does not differ depending on the type of the special figure related to the jackpot determination in each set value if the gaming state is the same. However, at each set value, the jackpot probability differs between the normal probability state and the high probability state even for the same special figure type. Specifically, regardless of the setting value, the jackpot probability is set higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. In any of the jackpot probability states, the jackpot probability increases as the set value increases.

  In addition, the small hit probability does not differ depending on the gaming state as long as each set value has the same special figure type. However, in each set value, even if the type of the special figure is the same, the small hit probability differs depending on the type of the special figure related to the big hit determination. More specifically, the small hit probability is set higher in Special Figure 1 than in Special Figure 2 regardless of the setting value. Regardless of the set value, the small hit probability is set almost the same for each type of special map.

  Further, each set value differs depending on the game state. Then, the loss probability of the special figure 1 becomes lower as the set value becomes higher in any game state. Further, the loss probability of the special figure 1 is higher in the normal probability state than in the high probability state at any set value. In other words, the loss is less likely to occur in the high probability state. Furthermore, the degree to which the probability of the loss decreases is greater in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. On the other hand, the loss probability of the special figure 2 is substantially the same in the normal probability state and the high probability state. The loss probability of the special figure 2 is substantially the same regardless of the set value in any game state.

  Also, for any of the set values, the loss selectivity indicates the relationship of the special figure 2 in the normal probability state / high probability state> the special figure 1 in the normal probability state >> the special figure 1 in the high probability state.

  Here, regarding the special figure 1, the loss probability in the high probability state greatly differs depending on the set value. On the other hand, regarding the special figure 1, the loss probability in the normal probability state is higher than the high probability state regardless of the set value, but the difference between the loss probability set values is smaller than the high probability state. Further, the loss probability in Toku-zu 2 is higher than the loss probability according to Toku-zu 1 regardless of the set value. However, the difference due to the set value of the loss probability in the normal probability state according to the special figure 2 and the difference due to the set value of the loss probability in the high probability state according to the special figure 2 are different in the normal probability state according to the special figure 1. It is overwhelmingly smaller than the difference due to the set value of the loss probability.

  Therefore, basically, in the high base game state in which the entire game progresses by causing the game ball to win in the second starting port 12 and performing the variable display of the special figure 2, the set value is estimated based on the occurrence frequency of the loss. It is difficult. On the other hand, in the low-base game state in which the entire game progresses by causing the game ball to win in the first starting port 11 and performing the variable display of the special figure 1, estimating the set value based on the frequency of occurrence of the loss is high base. It is easier than in the gaming state. Among the low base gaming states, the difference in the set value of the loss probability is larger in the high probability state, so that it is easier to estimate the set value based on the occurrence frequency of the loss.

  As described above, since the set value is suggested based on the frequency of occurrence of a loss that is not desired by the player, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the loss. As a result, it is possible to reduce the tiredness of the player from playing the game and to improve the interest in the game. Further, since the accuracy of suggesting the set value differs depending on the game state, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to enhance the overall game. In particular, in the low base game state where it is relatively difficult to execute the special figure variable display, since the accuracy of the suggestion of the set value based on the occurrence frequency of the loss is higher, it is possible to effectively prevent the game from getting tired. Can be. Further, in the high base game state in which the special figure variable display is relatively easy to be executed, the accuracy of the suggestion of the set value based on the occurrence frequency of the loss is lower, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in gaming interest.

  Also, at each set value, the probability of the loss according to the special figure 1 is different between the case of the normal probability state and the case of the high probability state, so that after the jackpot game B or the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol C is performed. When a game is played in the same latency mode, the game state can be estimated based on the frequency of occurrence of a loss. Thereby, the entertainment interest of the game is improved.

(Modification Example of Tenth Embodiment)
Specific values of the big hit probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability are not limited to those in the tenth embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. Further, the magnitude relation of the loss probability at each set value is not limited to the tenth embodiment, and may be set as appropriate. For example, in each set value, the loss probability may be set to be higher in the order of the high probability state of the special figure 1> the normal probability state of the special figure 1> the normal probability state / the high probability state of the special figure 2. .

  Further, the magnitude relation of the degree of the difference due to the set value of the loss probability is not limited to the tenth embodiment, and may be appropriately set. For example, in the order of the normal probability state in Toku-zu 1> the high probability state in Toku-zu 1> the normal probability state / high-probability state in Toku-zu 2, the degree of the difference due to the set value of the loss probability is set to be large. May be.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the eleventh embodiment, the set value can be set at random. In addition, the same code | symbol and a term are used about the structure same as a basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  In the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the eleventh embodiment, a set value setting method changeover switch 74 for setting a set value at random is provided. The setting value setting method changeover switch 74 is formed of a five-contact slide switch, and is provided near the setting value switch 71 as shown in FIG.

  By the setting value setting method changeover switch 74, "random setting OFF" in which the setting value is not set at random, "random setting A" in which the setting value is set randomly, "random setting B", "random setting C", and "random setting" Setting D ”. Specifically, it is possible to slide the knob 74k constituting the operation unit of the set value setting method changeover switch 74 in five steps, and by operating the knob 74k, "random setting OFF", "random setting" A "," random setting B "," random setting C ", and" random setting D ".

  The details of "random setting A", "random setting B", "random setting C", and "random setting D" will be described later, but "random setting A", "random setting B", and "random setting C" And “random setting D” have different set value selectivities. In the following, “random setting OFF”, “random setting A”, “random setting B”, “random setting C”, and “random setting D” are methods for setting a set value. Value setting method ".

  The set value setting method changeover switch 74 is connected to a set value setting method changeover switch sensor 74a capable of detecting a sliding operation of the knob 74k, that is, a changeover operation of the set value setting method. As shown in FIG. 104, the set value setting method changeover switch sensor 74a is connected to the game control board 100.

  When the knob 74k is slid, the set value setting method switch sensor 74a detects the position of the knob 74k and outputs a detection signal indicating the position to the game control board 100. The position of the knob 74k is associated with each setting value setting method. Therefore, the detection signal indicating the position of the knob 74k substantially indicates the selected setting value setting method.

  In the eleventh embodiment, a set value random number is provided in the same manner as the special symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the special figure variation pattern random number. The set value random number is a random number (determination information) used in a set value setting method determination described later. The game RAM 104 is provided with a set value random number counter indicating a set value random number.

  In the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process in step S12, the game control microcomputer 101 adds and updates the counter value of the set value random number counter by one. When the counter value of the set value random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to “0” and is added again. Note that the range of the set value random number can be set as appropriate, but is set to 0 to 65535 in the eleventh embodiment. Further, the initial value of the set value random number counter may be a value other than “0” or may be changed randomly. At least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating process in step S103 in the same manner as the update process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the general symbol related determination information and the special symbol related determination information. The value of the value random number counter is incremented by 1 and updated. It is performed both during the execution period of the game control timer interrupt process and during the other period (from the end of the game control timer interrupt process to the start of the next game control timer interrupt process). . The process of adding and updating the counter value of the set value random number counter by 1 may be only one of step S12 or step S103.

  Next, a setting value setting process according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 shows a setting value setting process in the eleventh embodiment. Steps S51, S53 to S56, and S63 in FIG. 105 are the same as steps S51, S52 to S55, and S56 of the basic embodiment.

  In the set value setting process of the eleventh embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the set value on the set value display 87 in step S51, and then, in step S52, uses the set value setting method switch 74 to set the set value. It is determined whether or not “random setting OFF” is selected. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that “random setting OFF” has been selected, the process proceeds to step S53. If it determines that “random setting OFF” has not been selected, the process proceeds to step S57. The process when the process proceeds to step S53 is the same as that in steps S52 to S56 in the basic embodiment, and a description thereof will not be repeated.

  In step S57, the game control microcomputer 101 is associated with the set value setting method selected by the set value setting method switch 74, specifically, any one of the selected random setting A to random setting D. Select the set value judgment table. Here, the setting value determination table will be described.

  The set value determination table is a data table used in the set value determination for determining the set value. The set value determination table includes a set value determination table (first set value determination table) used when the random setting A is selected, and a set value determination table (first set value determination table) used when the random setting B is selected. 2 setting value determination table), a setting value determination table used when random setting C is selected (third setting value determination table), and a setting value determination table used when random setting D is selected ( There is a fourth set value determination table). In other words, the setting value determination table is associated with the setting value setting method. Note that these set value determination tables are stored in the game ROM 103.

  Each set value determination table is configured such that each set value is selected at a predetermined selection rate. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 106, in each set value determination table, a set value random number determination value (set value random number determination value) is appropriately allocated to each set value at the selection rate shown in FIG. Have been. The setting value determination table is configured such that the probability that each setting value is selected differs depending on the setting value setting method (that is, random setting A to random setting D).

  In the first set value determination table, as the set value increases, the selectivity for the set value decreases. The selectivity for the set value “6” is set to “0”. That is, when the random setting A is selected, the setting value “6” is not selected. On the other hand, in the fourth set value determination table, as the set value increases, the selectivity for the set value increases. The selectivity for the set value “1” is set to “0”. That is, when the random setting D is selected, the setting value “1” is not selected.

  In the second set value judgment table and the third set value judgment table, the selectivity for the set value “1” and the set value “2” is the same, and the select values for the set value “3” and the set value “4” are the same. The rates are the same, and the selection rates for the set value “5” and the set value “6” are the same. Then, in the case of the second set value determination table, as the set value increases, the selectivity for the set value decreases. On the other hand, in the case of the third set value determination table, as the set value increases, the selectivity for the set value increases.

  In addition, unlike the first set value judgment table and the fourth set value judgment table, any of the second set value judgment table and the third set value judgment table is configured to be selectable. . Further, the second set value determination table and the third set value determination table are configured such that the difference in the selectivity depending on the set value is smaller than the first set value determination table and the fourth set value determination table. I have.

  Return the description to the setting value setting process. When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the set value determination table in step S57, then, in step S58, loads the counter value of the set value random number counter backed up as backup data in the game RAM 104 and loads the set value random number. In step S59, the set value random number indicated by the counter value is collated with the set value determination table selected in step S57 to determine the set value.

  Subsequently, in step S60, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the set value data indicating the set value determined by the set value determination in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104, and sets a new set value. In step S61, the set value is displayed on the set value display 87, and in step S62, it is determined whether or not there is an operation for confirming the set value. The game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the same process until it determines that there is an operation for setting the set value. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is an operation for setting the set value, the process proceeds to step S63, in which the set value designation command indicated by the set value data is set in an output buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the effect is produced. Transmit to control board 120.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the eleventh embodiment, the setting value can be set at random, so that the clerk of the game shop operates the setting value switch 71 to set the number of pachinko gaming machines PY1. The game value can be improved by changing the set value while reducing the effort to change the value. Further, since the set value can be arbitrarily set by selecting the random setting OFF with the set value setting method changeover switch 74, the functionality of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is improved. Further, since a plurality of setting value setting methods for setting the setting values at random are provided, it is possible to further reduce the bias of the setting values.

(Modification of the eleventh embodiment)
In the eleventh embodiment, the set value can be set at random. However, the mechanism and processing for this can be set as appropriate without being limited to the eleventh embodiment. For example, although the setting value setting method changeover switch 74 is configured by a slide switch, a switch may be used as long as it has another mechanism such as a rotary switch or a dip switch.

  Further, the type of the set value setting method for setting the set values randomly and the selectivity of the set values in each set value determination table may be appropriately set. Further, the set value may be set randomly by a method different from the set value determination.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-described basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the twelfth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an out-ball is detected. In addition, the small hit may be won in the big hit determination according to the special map 2, and the small hit game may be executed. Then, once the big hit is won and before the normal game state is set, the number of game balls paid out in the big hit game and the small hit game and the number of generated game balls generated after the normal game state is set A setting effect indicating a setting value is executed based on the number of out balls to be set. In addition, the same code | symbol and a term are used about the structure same as a basic embodiment, or the structure corresponding similarly.

  First, the jackpot determination table used in the jackpot determination will be described. The big hit determination table of the twelfth embodiment is associated with the set values as shown in FIGS. 107 (A) to 107 (C) and FIGS. 108 (A) to 108 (C).

  Furthermore, the jackpot determination table associated with the set value is also associated with the type of the starting port where the winning due to the jackpot determination is performed, that is, the type of the special figure to be variably displayed based on the jackpot determination. ing. In the following, the jackpot determination table associated with Toku-zu 1 is referred to as a “first jackpot determination table”, and the jackpot determination table associated with Toku-zu 2 is referred to as a “second jackpot determination table”.

  Further, the first big hit determination table and the second big hit determination table are also associated with the gaming state. That is, each of the first jackpot determination tables includes a first jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state and a first jackpot determination table used in the high probability state. On the other hand, each of the second jackpot determination tables includes a second jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state and a second jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

  In the first jackpot determination table, special symbol random number determination values are appropriately assigned to the jackpot and the loss as the jackpot determination result. That is, in the big hit determination according to the special figure 1, the small hit is not won. On the other hand, in the second jackpot determination table, a special symbol random number determination value is appropriately assigned to the jackpot and the loss as the jackpot determination result. That is, in the big hit determination according to the special figure 2, the small hit may be won. Note that the small hit winning probability is set to be the same regardless of the set value and the game state.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the type of the small hit symbol is one, and one small hit game is provided. As shown in FIG. 109 (A), in the small hitting game, the opening game is performed twice. In the opening game, the special winning opening 14 is opened for 0.9 seconds. Note that the closing time of the special winning opening 14 between each open game is 2.0 seconds. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small hitting game to the start of the first opening game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the special winning opening 14 is maintained for 0.5 seconds from the end of the last open game to the end of the small hit game.

  Further, the game state set after the big hit game in the twelfth embodiment is also different from that in the basic embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 109 (B), the gaming state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol D, and the jackpot symbol E is a high-probability low-base gaming state. The end condition of this game state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display “160 times”. On the other hand, the gaming state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol C and the jackpot symbol F is a low probability high base gaming state. The condition for ending this game state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display “100 times”.

  Further, as the effect mode set after the jackpot game, the probability change effect mode is set in the high probability low base game state after the jackpot game relating to the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol D, and the jackpot symbol E, In the low-probability, high-base game state after the jackpot game related to the symbol C and the jackpot symbol F, the time-saving effect mode is set.

  Further, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table is the same as the basic embodiment. On the other hand, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table is different from the basic embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 110, the special figure variation pattern determination table differs from that of the basic embodiment due to the provision of the small hits. The special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table includes a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for a low probability low base game state, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for a high probability low base game state, and a low probability high base game state. Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table.

  Further, the winning probability related to the hit determination, the normal figure fluctuating time, and the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D related to the auxiliary game are different from those in the basic embodiment. As shown in FIG. 111 (A), in the non-time saving state, a winning is achieved with a probability of 65533/65535. On the other hand, in the time reduction state, a winning is won with a probability of 65534/65535. In addition, as shown in FIG. 111 (B), the normal figure fluctuation time in the non-time saving state is 1.1 seconds. On the other hand, the normal figure fluctuation time in the time reduction state is 1.0 second. Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D relating to the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is one opening for 1.0 second. On the other hand, the opening pattern of the electric chew 12D related to the auxiliary game in the time saving state is twice opening for 2.5 seconds with an interval of 1.0 second (closed).

  As described above, in the twelfth embodiment, the non-time saving state is a gaming state similar to the time saving state with respect to opening of the electric chew 23D. Therefore, even in the non-working time state, it is possible to execute a game in which the player makes a right-handed shot and aims at the electric chute 23D to perform the special drawing 2 random determination. However, as shown in the special figure 2 change pattern determination table, the special figure 2 change time is set to be very long in the low-probability, low-base gaming state. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the twelfth embodiment basically performs left-handed play in the low-probability low-base game state, and performs right-handed play in the high-probability low-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state. Sex.

  Next, a process performed by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, an out sensor 19a for detecting an out ball is provided. Then, when the out sensor 19a detects an out ball, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an out designation command in an output buffer of the game RAM 104 in a sensor detection process (S19) (S226, see FIG. 49), and effects control. Transmit to substrate 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sends a special winning opening winning command indicating that the gaming ball has won the special winning opening 14 to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the special winning opening prize ball processing (S224) of the sensor detection processing. Set and send to effect control board 120.

  In addition to the sensor detection processing, special operation processing, special figure 2 determination processing, special figure 2 change pattern determination processing, and special symbol determination processing are different from the basic embodiment. However, the special operation processing, the special figure 2 determination processing, and the special symbol determination processing are the same as those in the tenth embodiment, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is performed based on the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the low probability low base game state includes the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the low probability low base game state, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the high probability low base game state, and the low probability There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for a high base gaming state. Therefore, in the special figure 2 change pattern determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 first checks the game state and selects a special figure 2 change pattern determination table associated with the game state.

  Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the big hit, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for the small hit, and the special figure Since there is a two variation pattern determination table, the game control microcomputer 101 further selects the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the jackpot determination result. If the jackpot determination result is a loss, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a reach determination and selects a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table associated with the reach determination result. Further, if the result of the reach determination is "no reach", the special figure 2 reservation number is confirmed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table associated with the special figure 2 reservation number is selected.

  Then, as in the case of the basic embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern based on the finally selected special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table, and determines the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern. The corresponding special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, the special figure fluctuation time is set in the special operation timer, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started.

  Next, the setting value effect will be described. The effect control microcomputer 121 wins the jackpot in the jackpot determination in the normal game state, and when the jackpot game is executed, the next time a normal game state advantageous to the player is set, the jackpot game, In addition, the number of game balls paid out by winning the large winning opening 14 in the small winning game, that is, the number of requests obtained by the player (hereinafter, referred to as “specific obtained number”) is counted. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the normal game state, and sets the number of outs (hereinafter referred to as “specific number of outs”) generated after exiting the game state advantageous to the player reaches the specific number of acquisitions. Execute the set value effect that suggests the set value that has been set. In the following, the case where the number of specific outs reaches the specific number of acquisitions is referred to as “establishment of set value effect conditions”.

  Here, a specific example from the execution of the jackpot game to the execution of the set value effect will be described. For example, it is assumed that a jackpot is won when the normal game mode is set and the normal effect mode is set, and as shown in FIG. 112 (A), a jackpot game starts and an opening effect is executed. Then, when the jackpot game progresses and the ending is reached, an ending effect is performed as shown in FIG. 112 (B). As in the basic embodiment, in the ending effect, a total prize ball number image G6 indicating the total prize ball number paid out based on winning in the special winning opening 14 in the jackpot game is displayed. Then, with the end of the jackpot game, it is assumed that a high-probability low-base game state is set and a probable-change effect mode is set.

  FIG. 112 (C) shows the display unit 50a immediately after the probable variation effect mode is set. When the probability variation effect mode is set, the probability variation background image G120 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. For example, at a predetermined position on the display unit 50a, the specific acquisition number image G40 representing the specific acquisition number is displayed on the display unit 50a. Displayed from above. Immediately after the jackpot game related to the jackpot winning when the normal game mode is set and the normal effect mode is set, the specific acquisition number image G40 is paid out based on the winning in the jackpot opening 14 in the jackpot game. Represents the total number of game balls played. Note that, during the certain variation effect mode, a right-handed image G41 for prompting right-handed is displayed on the upper right of the display unit 50a.

  Since the right-handed game is performed in the high-probability low-base game state, a small hit game may be executed. In the high-probability, low-base gaming state, when the small hitting game is executed and the big winning opening 14 is won and the game ball is paid out, the number (15) of the game balls paid out is specified every time the game is won. It is added to the acquired number image G40, and the specific acquired number indicated by the specific acquired number image G40 increases (see FIGS. 112 (D) to 112 (E)).

  Then, in the high-probability low-base gaming state and the probable variation effect mode, it is assumed that the special figure variable display is continuously executed and the jackpot is won again. Then, a jackpot game is performed, and finally an ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 113 (A). The total prize ball number image G6 displayed in the ending effect is paid by winning the big winning opening 14 in the current big hit game, the first big hit game, and the small hit game performed in the high-probability low-base game state. It indicates the number of game balls that have been issued, that is, the number of specific acquisitions up to that time.

  Subsequently, when the high-probability low-base game state is set again and the probable change effect mode is set, the small hit game is executed thereafter, and the specific acquisition number increases (FIG. 113 (B)). reference). Then, it is assumed that the end condition of the high probability low base gaming state is satisfied. Specifically, it is assumed that the special figure variable display has been executed 160 times without winning a big hit since the high-probability low-base gaming state was set. Then, immediately before the 160th special figure variable effect corresponding to the special figure variable display ends, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), a black special background image indicating the end of the high-probability low-base gaming state. The (special background image G121) is displayed, the probable change mode end suggestion image G42 indicating that the probable change effect mode is ended, and the final specific acquisition number image G43 indicating the final specific acquisition number (final specific acquisition number). Is displayed.

  The display of the special background image G121, the display of the probable change effect mode end suggestion image G42, and the display of the final specific acquired number image G43 are advantageous for indicating that the gaming state advantageous to the player ends and returns to the normal gaming state. A game state end effect is configured. The specific acquired number image G41 is deleted when the special background image G121 is displayed.

  When the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the low-probability low-base game state, that is, the normal game state is set, and the mode is switched from the positive change effect mode to the normal effect mode. When the mode is switched to the normal effect mode, as shown in FIG. 114A, the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and the set value effect count image G44 is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit 50a. You. The set value effect count image G44 is configured by a number and a horizontally long rectangular frame surrounding the number, and the number portion represents a value obtained by subtracting the specific number of outs from the specific acquisition number. Hereinafter, this value is referred to as “set value effect count number”. Note that the set value effect count displayed when the set value effect count image G44 is displayed matches the maximum specific acquisition number.

  After the normal game state is set, an out ball is generated, and every time an out ball is detected, the set value effect count number represented by the set value effect count image G44 is decremented by one. Then, as shown in FIGS. 114 (B) to 114 (C), in the normal game state, the set value effect count number represented by the set value effect count image G44 is subtracted according to the progress of the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 114 (D), when the set value effect count number represented by the set value effect count image G44 becomes “0”, the set value effect is executed.

  The effect of the set value effect can be appropriately set within a range in which the player can recognize the set value. For example, even if the set value effect is executed by displaying the set value suggestion image G46 on the display unit 50a. good. The set value suggestion image G46 is composed of an image in which the main character and fellow characters of the main character play a catch ball.

  When the set value effect count reaches “0”, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), a hero character appears at the lower right of the display unit 50a, and a friend character appears at the lower left of the display unit 50a. Subsequently, the numeral “0” according to the set value effect count image G44 changes to a ball, and as shown in FIG. 115 (B), after falling, the main character catches the ball. This ball also constitutes the set value suggestion image G46. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), the protagonist character throws the ball toward the friend character, and the friend character catches the ball as shown in FIG. 115 (D).

  Here, if the set value is “1”, as shown in FIG. 116 (A-1), the hero character and the fellow character bow and suggest that the set value effect ends, As shown at 116 (B-1), the setting value suggestion image G46 disappears. On the other hand, if the set value is “2” or more, as shown in FIG. 116 (A-2), the fellow character throws the ball at the hero character, and as shown in FIG. 116 (B-2), The main character catches the ball.

  If the set value is “3”, as shown in FIGS. 116 (A-1) to 116 (B-1), the hero character and the fellow character bow and disappear. If the set value is “3” or more, the protagonist character throws the ball at the friend character again as shown in FIG. 115 (C), and as shown in FIG. To catch. In this way, in the set value effect, catch balls are played a number of times corresponding to the set value.

  When the set value effect count image G44 changes to a part of the set value suggestion image G46 as shown in FIG. 115 (B), the display of the set value suggestion image G46 causes a big hit such as a so-called “announcement effect”. The effect does not indicate that the game is likely to be executed, but indicates a setting value. The change from the set value effect count image G44 to the set value suggestion image G46 is referred to as "set value suggestive effect".

  Next, an example of a process for executing the set value effect will be described. For example, when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the opening command when the normal game state is set and the normal effect mode is set, in the opening effect start process of step S4314, the effect is stored in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. Turn on the specific acquisition number count flag. The effect control microcomputer 121 counts the specific acquisition number when the specific acquisition number count flag is ON.

  To count the specific number of acquisitions, a set value effect counter 129 is provided in the effect RAM 124 (see FIG. 117). The effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning command has been received in the received command analyzing process, as in the case of the starting winning command. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special winning opening winning command has been received, it determines whether or not the specific acquisition number count flag is ON. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the specific acquisition number count flag is ON, the set value effect counter 129 sets “15” corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out based on winning in the special winning opening 14. to add.

  The specific acquisition number count flag is turned off when the normal effect mode is set. The effect control microcomputer 121 sets the normal effect mode when the special figure variable display is executed 160 times without winning a jackpot after the probability change effect mode is set. Alternatively, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the normal effect mode when the special figure variable display is executed 100 times without winning a jackpot after the time-saving effect mode is set. That is, for example, after the probabilistic effect mode is set or the time-saving effect mode is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 receives 160 or 100 signals without receiving a special figure change start command indicating a jackpot. After receiving the special figure change start command, and receiving a special figure change end command corresponding to the special figure change start command, the normal figure mode is set in the special figure change effect ending process of step S4308. The effect control microcomputer 121 changes the effect mode flag indicating the probable variable effect mode set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 or the effect mode flag indicating the time saving effect mode to the effect mode flag indicating the normal effect mode. To set the normal production mode.

  Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 shifts from the normal gaming state to the advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player including the jackpot gaming state, the high-probability low-base gaming state, and the low-probability high-based gaming state, and then proceeds to the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to count the specific acquisition number, which is the number of game balls acquired before the game state returns to the normal game state (hereinafter referred to as “advantageous game state stay period”).

  When the specific acquisition number count flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the specific acquisition number indicating the specific acquisition number which is the counter value of the set value effect counter 129 in the effect mode setting process (S4319). The command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 and transmitted to the image control board 140.

  Upon receiving the specific acquisition number display command, the image control board 140 displays a specific acquisition number image G40 indicating the specific acquisition number indicated by the specific acquisition number display command. The image control board 140 displays the specific acquisition number image G40 representing the specific acquisition number when the probability change effect mode or the time saving effect mode is set and the probability change background image G120 or the time saving background image G130 is displayed.

  When the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the special winning opening winning command and updates the set value effect counter 129, that is, adds “15”, the counter value of the updated set value effect counter 129, that is, the specific acquisition is performed. The specific acquisition number display command indicating the number is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 and transmitted to the image control board 140. When receiving the specific acquisition number display command while the specific acquisition number image G40 is being displayed, the image control board 140 changes the specific acquisition number image G40 indicating the specific acquisition number indicated by the specific acquisition number display command.

  Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 displays the temporary stop of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 according to the jackpot determination result before a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) before the special figure fluctuation effect immediately before setting the normal effect mode. And an advantageous game state end effect is executed. For this purpose, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the advantageous game state end effect start command and the final specific acquisition number display command indicating the final specific acquisition number that is the specific acquisition number at that time in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, It is transmitted to the image control board 140.

  Upon receiving the advantageous game state end effect start command and the final specific acquisition number display command, the image control board 140 performs the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 according to the jackpot determination result and performs the advantageous game state end effect. Execute. Specifically, the special background image G121 is displayed, the probable change effect mode end suggestion image G42, and the final specific acquired number image G43 are displayed.

  Further, in the special figure variation effect ending process of step S4308, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the specific acquisition number count flag when setting the normal effect mode, and stores the out ball count in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. Turn on the flag. When the out ball count flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a countdown toward a set value effect based on the out ball.

  For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the out ball count flag is ON in the received command analysis processing. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the out ball count flag is ON, it determines whether an out designation command has been received. When determining that the out designation command has been received, the effect control microcomputer 121 subtracts the set value effect counter 129 to “1” in accordance with the occurrence of the out ball. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the counter value of the set value effect counter 129 is “0”. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the counter value of the set value effect counter 129 is “0”, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the set value effect and turns off the out ball count flag.

  The effect control microcomputer 121 sets a set value effect start command indicating a set value in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 based on the set value flag, and transmits the command to the image control board 140 in order to execute the set value effect. When receiving the set value effect start command, the image control board 140 sets the number of the set value effect count image G44 to “0” on the display unit 50a, and then performs the set value suggestive implicit effect, and then starts the set value effect start. The above-described setting value effect indicating the setting value indicated by the command is executed.

  When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the counter value of the set value effect counter 129 is not “0”, the effect value of the set value effect counter image 129 is subtracted by “1”. A set value effect count image change command indicating the counter value of the counter 129 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 and transmitted to the image control board 140. When receiving the set value effect count image change command, the image control board 140 changes the number of the set value effect count image G44 to the counter value indicated by the set value effect count image change command, and changes the set value effect count image G44. I do.

  As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the twelfth embodiment, when the number of out balls reaches the number of gaming balls acquired in the big hit game or the small hit game, a set value effect indicating a set value is executed. You. Therefore, as the number of game balls obtained is smaller, the period until the set value effect is easily shortened, and as the number of game balls obtained is larger, the period until the set value effect is longer. When the set value effect is executed, the player can recognize the set value. Therefore, the execution of the set value effect is more advantageous to the player than not being executed. Here, it is disadvantageous for the player that the number of game balls obtained is small, but the disadvantageous is that the set value effect advantageous to the player is easily performed earlier, and the disadvantageous portion for the player is compensated. You. Therefore, the player's disappointment can be suppressed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  The set value effect is executed after returning from the advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state. Therefore, the player can recognize the set value while the game is continued. Therefore, a decrease in the willingness to play after returning to the normal game state is suppressed, and the interest in the game is improved.

(Modification of the twelfth embodiment)
In the twelfth embodiment, during the advantageous game state stay period, the number of game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening 14 in the jackpot game and the small hit game is set as the specific acquisition number, and the set value effect is executed. (Hereinafter referred to as “set value effect reference value”), but the method of setting the threshold value may be set as appropriate. For example, the number of game balls paid out by winning in the special winning opening 14 in the jackpot game performed during the advantageous game state stay period may be set as the set value effect reference value. Conversely, the number of game balls paid out by winning the large winning opening 14 in the small hitting game performed during the advantageous game state stay period may be set to the set value effect reference value.

  Furthermore, not only the game balls paid out by winning the big winning opening 14 but also the winning openings 11 and 12 and the general winning opening 10 when the big hit game and the small hit game are executed. The paid out game balls may also be added to the set value effect reference value.

  In the twelfth embodiment, one set value effect is executed based on the number of game balls paid out by the jackpot game and the number of game balls paid out by the small hit game. The set value effect based on the number of game balls paid out by the game and the set value effect based on the number of game balls paid out by the small hit game may be performed separately. Here, basically, the number of game balls paid out by the jackpot game is larger. In other words, after exiting the advantageous game state and returning to the normal game state, there is a high possibility that the set value effect related to the small hit game is executed earlier. Therefore, in the setting value effect related to the small hit game, the setting value is a relatively low setting value of “1” to “3” or the relatively high setting value of the setting value is “4” to “6”. In the setting value effect related to the big hit game, the setting value may be suggested to be identifiable.

  Further, in the twelfth embodiment, the game balls that have won the first starting port 11 and the like are included in the out ball, but the game balls that have won the first starting port 11 and the like are not detected and A sensor for detecting only the entered game balls is provided, and the set value effect is executed when the number of game balls discharged from the game area 6 through the out port 19 reaches the final specific acquisition number. Is also good.

  The effect content of the set value effect is not limited to the twelfth embodiment, but may be appropriately set. The set value effect may be executed using an image other than the set value suggestion image G43. Further, the set value effect may be executed using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the panel movable device 55. For example, when the set value effect is performed using the speaker 52, the set value may be suggested by outputting a sound set for each set value.

  Furthermore, the effect contents of the set value effect correspond to the set values on a one-to-one basis, but a plurality of effect contents are set so that one effect content may have a plurality of set values. The configuration may be such that there is a high possibility that the value is a certain set value depending on the content.

  In addition, in the certain variation production mode or the time reduction production mode, the specific acquired number image G40 and the final specific acquired number image G43 are displayed, but none or one of them may be displayed. Furthermore, although the set value suggestive effect is executed before the set value effect is performed, the set value suggestive effect may not be performed. That is, when the set value effect is executed, the set value effect count image G44 and the set value suggestion image G46 may not be linked.

  Further, the basic gaming properties (so-called “specs”) of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are not limited to the twelfth embodiment, but may be set as appropriate. For example, the small hit can be won in the big hit determination, but the gaming ability without the small hit may be used. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 does not execute the special figure 2 variable display when the special figure 1 variable display is executed, and executes the special figure 1 variable display when the special figure 2 variable display is executed. Is not executed, but a so-called “simultaneous fluctuation” may be performed so that the special figure 1 variable display and the special figure 2 variable display are simultaneously executed.

  Alternatively, the number of out balls may be counted after the jackpot game is completed, and the set value effect may be executed when the number of out balls reaches the number of game balls acquired in the jackpot game.

  Further, the conditions for executing the set value effect may be set to items other than the specific acquisition number and the specific out number. For example, the total number of round games performed during the advantageous game state stay period, the number of executions of the jackpot game, or the number of occurrences of the high probability state may be set as the condition for executing the set value effect. In this case, as the total number of round games performed in the advantageous game state stay period, the number of executions of the jackpot game, or the number of occurrences of the high probability state becomes disadvantageous to the player, the period until the set value effect is executed is earlier. Thus, these conditions are associated with the period until the set value effect is executed.

  For example, the total number of round games performed during the advantageous game state stay period, the number of executions of the jackpot game, or the number of occurrences of the high probability state can be associated with the number of executions and time of the special figure variable display. If the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display is performed, as the total number of round games performed during the advantageous game state stay period, the number of executions of the jackpot game, or the number of occurrences of the high probability state becomes disadvantageous to the player, the special figure variable Set so that the number of executions of display is reduced. For example, when the condition for executing the set value effect is associated with the number of executions of the big hit game, 30 special figure variable displays are associated with one big hit game, and the number of big hit games × 30 times When the figure variable display is executed, the set value effect may be executed. Or, if it is time, as the total number of round games performed during the advantageous game state stay period, the number of executions of the jackpot game, or the number of occurrences of the high probability state becomes disadvantageous to the player, the special time is shortened. Set. For example, when the condition for executing the set value effect is associated with the number of executions of the jackpot game, the time of 5 minutes is associated with one jackpot game, and the time of the number of jackpot games × 5 minutes elapses. A set value effect may be executed.

  Furthermore, in the twelfth embodiment, the set value effect count is counted based on the out ball after the normal game state is set and the final specific acquisition number is determined. For example, the first big hit game May be counted based on the out sphere after the execution of is performed. In this case, if the big hit game or the small hit game is executed before the set value effect count number becomes “0”, the number of game balls acquired at that time is added to the set value count value each time. . Also, when a specific condition is satisfied after the normal game state is set, such as after a predetermined number of special figure variable displays have been performed since the normal game state was set, the set value effect count may be counted. good.

7). Other Modifications Further, other modifications of the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first to twelfth embodiments will be described below.

  The structures of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 are not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, a two-contact slide switch may be used in place of the set value cylinder 70 as a machine that enables an operation of changing the set value. In this case, when the knob is arranged at one position, an operation of changing the set value may be performed. Further, a rotary switch or a slide switch may be used in place of the set value switch 71 as a machine for performing an operation of setting a set value. In this case, the position of the knob may be directly associated with the set value. Further, the positions of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 are not particularly limited, and may be appropriately changed.

  The configuration of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, another display such as a dot matrix LED display may be used as a display for displaying the set value. Further, the position of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the set value display 87 may be arranged at a place other than on the game control board 100.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the game RAM 104 is cleared by operating the set value cylinder 70 to change the set value. However, the operating means for clearing the game RAM 104 For example, the game RAM 104 may be cleared without performing an operation for enabling an operation of changing a set value by providing a step.

  Further, the setting value determination operation is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be appropriately set. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may recognize the rotation operation on the handle 72k, and the setting value may be determined by the rotation of the handle 72k. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 101 is made to be able to recognize the operation to the so-called "ball-lending button" or the "return button", and the set values are determined by the operation of these buttons. Is also good.

  Further, six set values from the set value “1” to the set value “6” are provided as set values, but the number of set values is not limited to six, and may be set as appropriate. Further, the identification information for the set value is not limited to a number such as “1” to “6”, but may be a character or another symbol such as “A” to “F”.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the big winning port 14 can be opened in the big hit game, but a winning area that can be opened in the big hit game may be provided in addition to the big winning port 14.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a specific jackpot symbol type is determined, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the big hit symbol type. However, the setting condition of the high probability state may be changed. For example, separately from the special winning device 14D, a second special winning device that can be opened and closed and that allows game balls to enter at the time of opening is provided at a position where the game balls in the game area 6 can reach, and during the big hit game In a predetermined round game, when a game ball that has been opened by the second big prize device and entered the second big prize device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side thereof, a high-probability state accompanies the end of the big hit game. May be set.

  In this case, for example, a specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second big winning device opens for a time (for example, 29.5 seconds) that is easy to enter the ball, A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol in which it is difficult to set a high-probability state) that can be opened for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. In addition, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which a game ball that has won the second big prize device can pass, and a distribution device that distributes the game ball to the specific area and the non-specific area is provided. And while the opening time of the second big winning device is the same, the combination of the opening mode of the second big winning device and the operating mode of the distribution device causes the big hit symbol and the high probability state that are easy to set the high probability state to be set. It is also possible to provide a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the game control board 100 performs the basic control related to the progress of the game, and performs the control related to the progress of the effect according to the progress of the game (control of the game) to the effect control board 120. As described above, the control of the game and the control of the effect are performed on different substrates, but may be performed on one substrate. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

  Although the set value effects according to the first to twelfth embodiments can be executed in different scenes, the set value effects according to the first to twelfth embodiments are appropriately performed in one pachinko gaming machine PY1. You may make it executable.

  In addition, the game machine of the present invention may be applied to other ball game machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball game machine and a spinning-type game machine (a so-called “slot machine”) without contradiction. It is possible.

8). Other Inventions Disclosed in Embodiments The following inventions A to J have been disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in [Embodiments for carrying out the invention]. In the description of the inventions A to K, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments of the invention and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, elements such as means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. The invention A is a generic name of the following inventions A1 to A6, the invention B is a generic name of the following inventions B1 to B5, the invention C is a generic name of the following inventions C1 to C8, and the invention D is a generic name of the following inventions C1 to C8. The invention E is a generic term of the following inventions E1 to E6, the invention F is a generic term of the following inventions F1 to F3, and the invention G is a generic term of the following invention G1. G is a generic name of the following inventions H1 to H4, Invention I is a generic name of the following inventions I1 to I5, and Invention J is a generic name of the following inventions J1 to J4. In addition, the invention K is a general term for the following inventions K1 to K5.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to the invention A1,
A starting prize area (starting ports 11 and 12) provided in a game area (game area 6) where game balls can flow down and in which game balls can enter;
When the game ball enters the start winning area, a determination (big hit determination) is made as to whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) which is more advantageous to the player than usual. Determining means (the game control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609);
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability (big hit probability) that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means executes a specific effect (set value effect) related to the set value set by the set value, based on the number of game balls (out balls) discharged to the outside of the game area. It is characterized by having

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to invention A2 is:
A gaming machine according to invention A1,
The effect control means, when the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area is at least a predetermined threshold value (out ball determination value) or more, by determining that the determination means to enter the advantageous game state The specific effect may be executed.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to invention A3 is:
A game area (game area 6) in which game balls can flow down is formed, and a prize area (general prize opening 10, starting ports 11, 12 and large prize opening 14) in which game balls can enter is provided in the game area, A gaming machine in which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when the game balls enter the prize area,
The winning area includes a starting winning area (starting ports 11 and 12).
When the game ball enters the start winning area, a determination (big hit determination) is made as to whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) which is more advantageous to the player than usual. Determining means (the game control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609);
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means is configured to set the setting value based on a difference number that is a difference between the number of the paid prize balls and the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area. A special effect (set value effect) related to a value may be executed.

8-1-4. Invention A4
The gaming machine according to invention A4 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention A3,
The effect control means may execute the specific effect when the difference number reaches a predetermined threshold value (difference number determination value).

8-1-5. Invention A5
The gaming machine according to the invention A5 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions A1 to A4,
The specific effect is an effect indicating the set value set by the set value.

8-1-6. Invention A6
The gaming machine according to Invention A6 is:
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions A1 to A5,
Operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value;
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to Invention B1 is:
Satisfaction of predetermined conditions (winning to first starting port 11 with special figure 1 reserved number <4, winning to second starting port 12 with special figure 2 reserved number <4), which is more advantageous to the player than usual Determining means (a gaming control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter a favorable gaming state (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a time saving state, etc.);
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means can execute a specific effect (set value effect) based on the set value,
The execution frequency of the specific effect is different depending on the set value.

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to Invention B2 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention B1,
The effect control means,
On the display unit (display unit 50a), after the effect symbol (composite symbol G22) is variably displayed on the basis of the determination result by the determination unit, it can be stopped and displayed in a manner to notify the determination result,
The specific effect is executed with the effect symbol at the time of the stop display.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to invention B3 is:
A gaming machine according to invention B2,
The effect control means is capable of executing the specific effect when the determination means determines not to enter the advantageous gaming state.

8-2-4. Invention B4
The gaming machine according to invention B4 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention B2 or Invention B3,
The effect symbol has a first part (lottery result suggestion unit G22a) related to the determination result of the determination unit and a second part (set value suggestion unit G22b) related to the set value.
The determination result of the determination means is notified by the content (number) displayed on the first part of the effect symbol stopped and displayed, and the content (〇, △, ×), the specific effect can be executed.

8-2-5. Invention B5
The gaming machine according to invention B5 is:
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions B1 to B5,
Operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value;
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to Invention C1 is:
Satisfaction of predetermined conditions (winning to first starting port 11 with special figure 1 reserved number <4, winning to second starting port 12 with special figure 2 reserved number <4), which is more advantageous to the player than usual Determining means (a gaming control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter a favorable gaming state (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a time saving state, etc.);
The display unit (special figure display 81) performs display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) for variably displaying identification information (special figure) for notifying the judgment result based on the judgment result by the judgment means. A game control microcomputer 101);
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means can execute a specific effect (set value effect) related to the set value based on the number of times of performing the variable display of the identification information.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to invention C2 is:
A gaming machine according to invention C1,
The set value is composed of natural numbers (1 to 6),
The effect control means is capable of executing the specific effect on condition that a predetermined number of consecutive digits (lower two digits, lower three digits) of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the identification information is the same number. It is characterized by the following.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to invention C3 is:
A gaming machine according to invention C2,
The effect control means, the condition that the predetermined number of digits is the same number, the condition that the determination result is a notification target of the variable display of the identification information is to enter the advantageous game state, the specific effect Can be executed.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The gaming machine according to invention C4 is:
A gaming machine according to invention C2 or invention C3,
The specific effect includes a first specific effect (odd setting suggesting effect) indicating that the set value is odd, and a second specific effect (even setting suggesting effect) indicating that the setting value is even. And there is
The effect control means,
The first specific effect can be executed based on that the predetermined number of digits is the same odd number,
The second specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the predetermined number of digits is the same even number.

8-3-5. Invention C5
The gaming machine according to invention C5 is provided with:
A gaming machine according to invention C4,
The specific effect includes, in addition to the first specific effect and the second specific effect, a third specific effect (odd-high setting) indicating that the probability is an odd set value among the set values. Suggestion effect), and a fourth specific effect (even number high setting suggestion effect) that indicates that the probability is an even set value among the set values,
The effect control means,
The first specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the lower two digits of the execution number of the variable display of the identification information are the same odd number,
The second specific effect can be executed based on that the lower two digits of the execution number of the variable display of the identification information are the same even number,
The third specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the lower three digits of the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information are the same odd number,
The fourth specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the lower three digits of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the identification information are the same even number.

8-3-6. Invention C6
The gaming machine according to invention C6 is provided with:
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions C1 to C5,
Operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value;
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-3-7. Invention C7
The gaming machine according to invention C7 is provided with:
The satisfaction of the predetermined condition (winning in the first opening 11 with the special figure 1 reserved number <4, winning in the second opening 12 with the special figure 2 reserved number <4) causes the player to be more than the normal gaming state. Determining means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (eg, a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a time saving state, etc.)
The display unit (special figure display 81) performs display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) for variably displaying identification information (special figure) for notifying the judgment result based on the judgment result by the judgment means. A game control microcomputer 101);
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means is capable of executing a specific effect (set value effect) related to the set value based on the number of times that the game has entered the advantageous gaming state.

8-3-8. Invention C8
The gaming machine according to invention C8 is:
A gaming machine according to invention C7,
The advantageous game state is a state in which a special game (big hit game) capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege is being executed,
The determination means determines whether or not to execute the special game based on satisfaction of the predetermined condition,
Along with the end of the special game, a game state control means (S1504, S1506 for performing a game state control unit capable of setting a specific game state (high probability state, time saving state, etc.) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state A control microcomputer 101).
The game state control means sets the specific game state to the normal game state when a predetermined end condition is satisfied,
After the special game is executed, the effect control means can execute the specific effect based on the number of times the special game is executed without satisfying the end condition.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to Invention D1 is:
Satisfaction of predetermined conditions (winning to first starting port 11 with special figure 1 reserved number <4, winning to second starting port 12 with special figure 2 reserved number <4), which is more advantageous to the player than usual Determining means (a gaming control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter a favorable gaming state (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a time saving state, etc.);
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means,
On the display unit (display unit 50a), after a plurality of effect symbols (effect symbols G10) are variably displayed based on the determination result by the determination unit, it is possible to stop and display the determination result in a manner to notify the determination result. Yes,
A specific effect (set value effect) indicating the set value can be executed by the plurality of effect symbols stopped and displayed.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to Invention D2 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention D1,
The effect control means is capable of executing the specific effect by the plurality of effect symbols stopped and displayed in a mode to notify that the state is not set to the advantageous game state when the determination means determines that the state is not set to the advantageous game state. It is characterized by being.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to Invention D3 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention D2,
The effect control means,
When the variable display of the plurality of effect symbols is being performed, it is possible to put the plurality of effect symbols in a reach state,
If the plurality of effect symbols in which the reach state is not executed are displayed, the specific effect can be executed by the plurality of effect symbols stopped and displayed in a mode notifying that the advantageous game state is not set. There is a feature.

8-4-4. Invention D4
The gaming machine according to Invention D4 is:
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions D1 to D3,
Operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value;
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to invention E1 is:
Satisfaction of predetermined conditions (winning to first starting port 11 with special figure 1 reserved number <4, winning to second starting port 12 with special figure 2 reserved number <4), which is more advantageous to the player than usual Determining means (a gaming control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter a favorable gaming state (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a time saving state, etc.);
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The set values include a first set value (set value 1 to set value 4), a second set value (set value 5 to set value 6) having a higher probability than the first set value, and There is
The effect contents of the predetermined effect that the effect control means can execute include a first effect content (win or success) and a second effect content (defeat or failure),
When the first set value is set, after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control means, a specific event (big hit game state, Continuation of a round game, high probability state, continuation of a high probability state, etc.) may occur, while the specific event occurs after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed by the effect control means. Will not
When the second set value is set, the specific event may occur after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control unit, and the effect control unit may execute the specific event. The specific event may occur even after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to invention E2 is:
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
When the determination unit determines that the game mode is set to the advantageous game state, the special game execution unit (S1505 performs a special game (big hit game) that can acquire a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) as the advantageous game state. A game control microcomputer 101) is further provided,
The specific event is the execution of the special game.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to invention E3 is:
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
When the determination unit determines that the game mode is set to the advantageous game state, the special game execution unit (S1505 performs a special game (big hit game) that can acquire a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) as the advantageous game state. A game control microcomputer 101) is further provided,
In the special game, a plurality of unit games (round games) are executed,
The special game includes a case where the unit game is executed a first number of times and a case where the unit game is executed a second number of times after the first number of times.
The specific event is characterized in that the unit game is executed the second number of times after the first number of times is executed.

8-5-4. Invention E4
The gaming machine according to invention E4 is:
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
When the determination unit determines that the game mode is set to the advantageous game state, the special game execution unit (S1505 performs a special game (big hit game) that can acquire a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) as the advantageous game state. A game control microcomputer 101);
A specific game state setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1506) for setting the specific game state (high probability state, time saving state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state with the end of the special game; Further comprising
The specific event is a setting of the specific game state.

8-5-5. Invention E5
The gaming machine according to invention E5 is:
A gaming machine according to invention E1,
When the determination unit determines that the game mode is set to the advantageous game state, the special game execution unit (S1505 performs a special game (big hit game) that can acquire a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) as the advantageous game state. A game control microcomputer 101);
A specific game state setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1506) for setting the specific game state (high probability state, time saving state) more advantageous to the player than the normal game state with the end of the special game; Further comprising
The specific game state includes when the first period can be continued, and when the second period can be continued after the first period,
The specific event is characterized in that the specific game state can be continued for the second period after the specific game state has continued for the first period.

8-5-6. Invention E6
The gaming machine according to invention E6 is:
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions E1 to E5,
Operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value;
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to invention F1 is:
Satisfaction of predetermined conditions (winning to first starting port 11 with special figure 1 reserved number <4, winning to second starting port 12 with special figure 2 reserved number <4), which is more advantageous to the player than usual Determining means (a gaming control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter a favorable gaming state (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a time saving state, etc.);
The display unit (special figure display 81) performs display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) for variably displaying identification information (special figure) for notifying the judgment result based on the judgment result by the judgment means. A game control microcomputer 101);
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control unit is configured to specify the set value based on a specific number of times (number of add-ons) that is a number of times that the variable display of the identification information is continuously performed without the determination unit determining that the advantageous game state is set. An effect (set value effect) can be executed.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to invention F2 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention F1,
The specific effect includes a first specific effect and a second specific effect,
The effect control means can execute the first specific effect when the specific number of times reaches the first number, and the specific number of times reaches the second number larger than the first number. At the opportunity, the second specific effect can be executed,
The second specific effect is easier to recognize the set value than the first specific effect.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to invention F3 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention F1 or Invention F2,
Operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value;
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The gaming machine according to Invention G1 is:
A predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is established by satisfying a predetermined condition (a prize in the first opening 11 with the special figure 1 reserved number <4 and a prize in the second starting port 12 with the special figure 2 reserved number <4). A determination unit (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) capable of acquiring a game).
When it is determined by the determination means to execute the special game, a special game control means to execute the special game,
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to execute the special game is different,
In the special game, a plurality of unit games (round games) are executed,
The special game includes a plurality of types of the special game (fifth big hit game to ninth big hit game) depending on the number of unit games to be executed,
The effect control means,
At least when any one of the plurality of setting values including the maximum setting value (setting value 6), which is the setting value with the highest probability among the setting values, is set, the number of times of the unit game is the maximum. In the maximum special game that is the special game of the maximum special game suggestion effect (blessing effect) that suggests that the maximum special game is executed,
When the maximum set value is set, the maximum special game suggestion effect may indicate that the maximum set value is set.

8-7-2. Invention G2
The gaming machine according to Invention G2 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention G1,
In the maximum special game suggestion effect, a first maximum special game suggestion effect (maximum setting value suggestion blessing effect) indicating that the maximum setting value is set, and that the maximum setting value is set. There is a second largest special game suggestion production that does not suggest (normal blessing production)
The effect control means,
When the maximum set value is set, the first maximum special game suggestion effect, or the second maximum special game suggestion effect can be executed,
When a setting value other than the maximum value setting value is set, the second maximum special game suggestion effect can be executed.

8-7-3. Invention G3
The gaming machine according to Invention G3 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention G1 or Invention G2,
Operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value;
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-8-1. Invention H1
The gaming machine according to invention H1 is:
Satisfaction of predetermined conditions (winning to first starting port 11 with special figure 1 reserved number <4, winning to second starting port 12 with special figure 2 reserved number <4), which is more advantageous to the player than usual Determining means (a gaming control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter a favorable gaming state (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a time saving state, etc.);
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The effect control means,
On the display unit, after the effect symbol (effect symbol G10) is variably displayed on the basis of the determination result by the determination unit, the display can be stopped and displayed in a manner to notify the determination result,
The variable display of the effect symbol can be started based on the set value.

8-8-2. Invention H2
The gaming machine according to invention H2 is:
A gaming machine according to invention H1,
The effect control means can start the variation display of the effect symbol based on the set value with respect to the variation display of the effect symbol performed first after the gaming machine is turned on. It is characterized by being.

8-8-3. Invention H3
The gaming machine according to Invention H3 is:
A game machine according to invention H1 or invention H2,
The effect control means includes: a display mode (normal start mode) when the effect symbol starts changing display when the set value of the day is the same as the set value of the previous day; and the set value of the day. A display mode (first special start mode, second special start mode) when the effect symbol starts changing display when the set value is different from the previous day may be different.

8-8-4. Invention H4
The gaming machine according to Invention H4 is:
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions H1 to H3,
Operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value;
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-9-1. Invention I1
The gaming machine according to Invention I1 is:
A predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is established by satisfying a predetermined condition (a prize in the first opening 11 with the special figure 1 reserved number <4 and a prize in the second starting port 12 with the special figure 2 reserved number <4). ) For determining whether or not to execute the first special game (big hit game) or the second special game (small hit game) that can acquire the game (microcomputer 101 for game control performing S1602 and S1609);
When the determination means determines that the first special game is to be executed, a first special game control means for executing the first special game (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1505);
When the determination means determines that the second special game is to be executed, a second special game control means for executing the second special game (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1507);
A game state setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1506) capable of newly setting a game state (high probability state or the like) with the end of the first special game;
Setting value setting means (game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6);
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
The probability that the determination unit determines to execute the first special game is different depending on the set value.

8-9-2. Invention I2
The gaming machine according to Invention I2 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention I1,
The probability that it is determined that neither the first special game nor the second special game is executed differs depending on the set value.

8-9-3. Invention I3
The gaming machine according to Invention I3 is:
A gaming machine according to Invention I2,
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same.

8-9-4. Invention I4
The gaming machine according to Invention I4 is:
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions I1 to I3,
The predetermined condition includes a first condition (a prize to the first starting port 11 with the special figure 1 reserved number <4) and a second condition (a prize to the second starting port 12 with the special figure 2 reserved number <4). )
The determining means includes a first determining means for determining whether to execute the first special game or the second special game based on the establishment of the first condition (the game control microcomputer 101 performing S1602). And a second determination means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1609) for determining whether to execute the first special game or the second special game depending on the establishment of the second condition. ,
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the first determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same,
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the second determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same,
The probability that the first determination means determines to execute the second special game is different from the probability that the second determination means determines to execute the second special game.

8-9-5. Invention I5
The gaming machine according to Invention I5 is:
A gaming machine according to any one of inventions I1 to I4,
Operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the setting value;
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operation means.

8-10-1. Invention J1
The gaming machine according to invention J1 is:
Satisfaction of predetermined conditions (winning to first starting port 11 with special figure 1 reserved number <4, winning to second starting port 12 with special figure 2 reserved number <4), which is more advantageous to the player than usual Determining means (a gaming control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter a favorable gaming state (a jackpot gaming state, a high probability state, a time saving state, etc.);
Setting means for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6).
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
Depending on the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to enter the advantageous game state is different,
The setting means may set the set value by determining which set value to set.

8-10-2. Invention J2
The gaming machine according to invention J2 is:
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
Further comprising a switching operation means (setting value setting method switching switch 74) capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options,
The plurality of options include at least a first specific option (for example, random setting A, D) and a second specific option (for example, random setting B, C),
When the setting unit sets some or all of the plurality of setting values in the determination between when the first specific option is selected and when the second specific option is selected. It is characterized in that the determination probabilities are different.

8-10-3. Invention J3
The gaming machine according to invention J3 is:
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
First switching operation means (setting value setting method switching switch 74) capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options,
A second switching operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation of switching the setting value;
The plurality of options include at least a specific option (random setting A to random setting D) and a non-specific option (random setting OFF),
The setting means,
When the specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value by the determination,
When the non-specific option is selected, the setting value can be set based on an operation on the second switching operation means.

8-10-4. Invention J4
The gaming machine according to invention J4 is:
A gaming machine according to invention J1,
First switching operation means (setting value setting method switching switch 74) capable of performing an operation of switching a plurality of options,
A second switching operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation of switching the setting value;
The plurality of options include at least a first specific option (random setting A, random setting D), a second specific option (random setting B, random setting C), and a non-specific option (random setting OFF). ,
The setting means,
When the first specific option or the second specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value by the determination,
When the non-specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value based on an operation on the second switching operation means,
When the setting unit sets a part or all of the plurality of setting values in the determination between when the first specific option is selected and when the second specific option is selected. It is characterized in that the determination probabilities are different.

8-11-1. Invention K1
The gaming machine according to Invention K1 is:
A starting winning area (first starting port 11, second starting port 12) provided in a game area (game area 6) in which game balls can flow down, and in which game balls can enter;
Determining means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to execute a special game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out when the game ball enters the start winning area;
Setting means (a game control microcomputer 101 performing S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6);
Effect control means (effect control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
The effect control means includes: a payout number (specific acquisition number) of game balls paid out when the special game is performed; and a game discharged to the outside of the game area after the special game is performed. A specific effect (set value effect) indicating the set value set by the set value means may be executed based on the number of discharged balls (specific number of outs).

8-11-2. Invention K2
The gaming machine according to invention K2 is:
A gaming machine according to invention K1,
The effect control means can execute the specific effect on condition that the discharge number reaches the payout number.

8-11-3. Invention K3
The gaming machine according to Invention K3 is:
A gaming machine according to invention K1 or invention K2,
The special game includes a first special game (big hit game) and a second special game (small hit game),
After the first special game is over, an advantageous game state (high-probability high-base game state, high-probability low-base game state, low-probability high-base game state) that can be set to be more advantageous to the player than the normal game state can be set. Further comprising a game state setting means,
The payout number is a number of game balls paid out when the first special game and the second special game are being performed.

8-11-4. Invention K4
The gaming machine according to Invention K4 is:
A gaming machine according to invention K3,
Further comprising a normal game state setting means capable of setting the normal game state,
The payout number is set such that the first special game and the second special game are performed in a specific period from when the special game is executed to when the normal game state is set by the normal game state setting means. The number of game balls paid out when
The payout number is a number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area after the specific period.

PY1 Pachinko gaming machine 1 Gaming board 11 First starting opening 11a First starting opening sensor 12 Second starting opening 12a Second starting opening sensor 14 Large winning opening 14a Large winning opening sensor 50 Image display Device 50a Display unit 52 Speaker 53 Frame lamp 55 Panel movable device 55k Panel movable body 70 Set value cylinder 70a Set value cylinder sensor 71 Set value switch 71 Set value switch sensor 74 Set value setting method Changeover switch 74a Setting value setting method Changeover switch sensor 100 Game control board 101 Game control microcomputer 120 Effect control board 121 Effect control microcomputer 140 Image control board

Claims (4)

A starting prize area in which a game ball is provided in a game area where the game ball can flow, and a game ball can enter;
Determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game in which a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out by the game balls having entered the start winning prize area;
Setting means for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values;
Effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means performs the determination based on the set value,
The effect control means, the payout number of game balls paid out when the special game is being performed, and the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area after the special game is performed A gaming machine for executing a specific effect indicating the set value set by the set value means based on the set value. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The gaming machine, wherein the effect control means is capable of executing the specific effect on condition that the number of discharges reaches the number of payouts. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The special game includes a first special game and a second special game,
After the first special game is over, the game apparatus further includes an advantageous game state setting unit capable of setting an advantageous game state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state,
The gaming machine, wherein the payout number is the number of gaming balls paid out when the first special game and the second special game are being performed. The gaming machine according to claim 3,
Further comprising a normal game state setting means capable of setting the normal game state,
The payout number is set such that the first special game and the second special game are performed in a specific period from when the special game is executed to when the normal game state is set by the normal game state setting means. The number of game balls paid out when
The gaming machine, wherein the payout number is the number of gaming balls discharged to the outside of the gaming area after the specific period.